Table of Contents

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Introduction
Instrument Cluster
4
10
Warning and control lights
Gauges
10
15
Entertainment Systems
19
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD
AM/FM stereo with CD
Rear seat controls
Rear seat entertainment system
Climate Controls
Manual heating and air conditioning
Electronic automatic temperature control
Lights
Headlamps
Turn signal control
Bulb replacement
Driver Controls
Windshield wiper/washer control
Power windows
Speed control
Message center
19
37
51
57
69
69
72
81
81
84
86
92
92
99
103
114
Locks and Security
128
Keys
Locks
Anti-theft system
128
128
129
1
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating
Safety restraints
Air bags
Child restraints
Driving
141
155
168
176
191
Starting
Brakes
Transmission operation
Vehicle loading
Trailer towing
191
195
202
219
221
Roadside Emergencies
227
Getting roadside assistance
Hazard flasher switch
Fuel pump shut-off switch
Fuses and relays
Changing tires
Jump starting
Wrecker towing
Customer Assistance
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only)
2
141
227
228
228
230
236
241
247
249
258
Table of Contents
Cleaning
259
Maintenance and Specifications
265
Engine compartment
Engine oil
Battery
Fuel information
Air filter(s)
Low tire warning system
Part numbers
Refill capacities
Lubricant specifications
267
269
272
280
294
298
300
300
303
Accessories
309
Index
313
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2002 Ford Motor Company
3
Introduction
The following warning may be required by California law:
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is
an integral part of the vehicle.
4
Introduction
Fuel pump shut-off switch In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury and prevent possible
damage to others, your vehicle and its equipment? In this guide, answers
to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning
triangle symbol. These comments should be read and observed.
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
5
Introduction
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During
the first 1,600 km (1,000 miles) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is
recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 7.3L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s
Guide.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Air bag in the Seating and safety
restraints chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and
instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be used in front of a passenger side air bag unless the
air bag can be and is turned OFF.
6
Introduction
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an
accident.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
MIDDLE EAST/NORTH AFRICA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this Owner
Guide for all other required information and warnings.
7
Introduction
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt
Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side
Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Tether
Anchorage
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid Non-Petroleum Based
Traction Control
AdvanceTrac
Master Lighting Switch
Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front
Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset
Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
Power Windows
Front/Rear
8
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot
Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas
Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Emission System
Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check fuel cap
Low tire warning
9
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have
the respective system inspected immediately.
Service engine soon
Illuminates briefly to ensure the
SERVICE
system is functional. If it comes on
ENGINE
after the engine is started, one of
SOON
the engine’s emission control
systems may be malfunctioning. The light may illuminate without a
driveability concern being noted. The vehicle will usually be drivable and
will not require towing.
Light remains on:
Temporary malfunctions may cause the light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been properly installed and securely
tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with high quality fuel of the recommended octane and/or properly
installing and securely tightening the fuel cap. After three driving cycles
without these or any other temporary malfunctions present, the light
should turn off. (A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is
required.
10
Instrument Cluster
If the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first available
opportunity.
Light is blinking:
Engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter.
You should drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced at the first available
opportunity.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Brake system warning
To confirm the brake system
warning light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position
(alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON
position to START position, the light will momentarily illuminate prior to
reaching the START position). It also illuminates if the parking brake is
engaged. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate as
described, seek service immediately. Illumination after the parking brake
is released indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction
and the brake system should be serviced immediately by a qualified
technician.
Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more information.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
To confirm the anti-lock brake
system (ABS) warning light is
ABS
functional it will momentarily
illuminate when the ignition is
turned to the ON position
(alternatively for some vehicles when the ignition is moved from the ON
position to the START position, the light will momentarily illuminate just
prior to reaching the START position). If the light remains on, continues
to flash or fails to illuminate, have the ABS serviced immediately. If the
ABS light remains on, it means the anti-lock brake system has
malfunctioned and is disabled, however, the normal brake system will
still function unless the brake warning light also remains illuminated and
parking brake is off. Refer to Brakes in the Driving chapter for more
information.
11
Instrument Cluster
Safety belt
Illuminates to remind you to fasten
your safety belts. For more
information, refer to the Seating
and safety restraints chapter.
Air bag readiness
Illuminates to confirm that the air
bags (front or side) are operational.
If the light fails to illuminate,
continues to flash or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately.
Charging system
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly.
AdvanceTrac姟 (if equipped)
Flashes when the AdvanceTrac娂
system is active. If the light remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately.
For more information, refer to the
Driving chapter.
Low fuel
Illuminates when the fuel level in
the fuel tank is at, or near, empty
(refer to Fuel gauge in this chapter
for more information).
Low washer fluid
Illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
12
Instrument Cluster
Speed control
Illuminates when the speed control
is activated.
Oil pressure/Engine coolant
Illuminates when the engine coolant
temperature is above the normal
range or the engine oil pressure is
outside normal range. Check the
engine oil and coolant level refer to
Adding engine oil and Adding coolant in the Maintenance and
specifications chapter.
Turn signals
Illuminates when the turn signals or
the hazard lights are turned on. If
the lights stay on continuously or
flash faster, check for a burned-out bulb.
High beams
Illuminates when the high beam
headlamps are turned on.
Door ajar
Illuminates when any door is open
(or not fully closed).
DOOR
AJAR
13
Instrument Cluster
O/D off
Illuminates when the overdrive
O/D
function has been turned OFF using
OFF
the Transmission Control Switch
(TCS) on the gearshift. If the light
does not come on or the light flashes steadily, have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could occur.
Four wheel drive low (if equipped)
Illuminates when four-wheel drive
low is is engaged. If the light
continues to flash have the system
serviced.
4x4
LOW
Four wheel drive high (if equipped)
Illuminates when four-wheel drive is
put in high range. If the light
continues to flash have the system
serviced.
4x4
HIGH
Check air suspension (if equipped)
Illuminates when the air suspension
CHECK
switch is turned OFF, the load limit
SUSP
is exceeded or the air suspension
system requires servicing.
For information on the air suspension system, refer to the Driving
chapter.
Safety belt warning chime
Sounds to remind you to fasten your safety belts.
BeltMinder姟 chime
Sounds intermittently to remind you to fasten your safety belts.
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning chime
Sounds when a malfunction in the supplemental restraint system (front
or side airbags) has been detected. Have the supplemental restraint
system inspected immediately.
Headlamps on warning chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the key is removed
from the ignition and the driver’s door is opened.
14
Instrument Cluster
Key-in-ignition warning chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition and the driver’s door is
opened.
Door ajar warning chime
Sounds when any door or liftgate is opened (or not fully closed).
GAUGES
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant. At normal operating
temperature, the needle remains
within the normal area (the area
between the “H” and “C”). If it
enters the red section, the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as
soon as safely possible, switch off
the engine immediately and let the
engine cool. Refer to Engine
coolant in the Maintenance and
specifications chapter.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot. Steam and scalding liquid from a hot cooling
system can burn you badly.
15
Instrument Cluster
This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant, not the
coolant level. If the coolant is not at its proper level the gauge indication
will not be accurate. If the gauge enters the red section, the oil
pressure/engine coolant and Check Engine/Service Engine Soon
indicators illuminate, refer to What you should know about fail-safe
cooling in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
Engine oil pressure gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. At
normal operating temperature, the
needle will be in the normal range
(the area between the “L” and “H”);
if the needle goes below the normal
range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible and switch off the
engine immediately. Check the oil
level. Add oil if needed (refer to
Engine oil in the Maintenance
and specifications chapter). If the
oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your dealership or by a
qualified technician.
Battery voltage gauge
Indicates battery voltage. If the
pointer moves and stays outside the
normal operating range, have the
vehicle’s electrical system checked
as soon as possible.
16
Instrument Cluster
Fuel gauge
Displays approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank. The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
When refueling the vehicle from
empty indication, the amount of fuel
that can be added will be less than
the advertised capacity due to the
reserve fuel.
If the key is left in the ON position
during fueling, a minimum of 22.2 L (six gallons) must be added to the
fuel tank in order for the gauge to instantaneously update. If less than
six gallons is added, the gauge will take between five to twenty minutes
to update.
Speedometer
Indicates the current vehicle speed.
Odometer
Registers the total kilometers (miles) of the vehicle.
• Standard instrument cluster
TRIP
• Optional instrument cluster
Refer to Message Center in the Driver Controls chapter for information
on how to switch the display from metric to English measurements.
17
Instrument Cluster
Trip odometer
Registers the kilometers (miles) of individual journeys.
• Standard instrument cluster
Press and release the
SELECT/RESET button to toggle
between the odometer and trip
odometer display. Press and hold
the button to reset.
• Optional instrument cluster
Press and release the TRIP/RESET
button to toggle between the
odometer and trip odometer display.
Press and hold the button to reset.
Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
18
TRIP
Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD
DISC
VOL PUSH ON
EJ
FM 1
AMC
BL
AM
ST
MUTE
RF
FM
EJ
DOLBY B NR
TAPE
CD
AUTO
SEEK
TUNE
SCAN
BASS
TREB
REW
FF
SIDE 1-2
1
2
3
SEL
4
BAL
CLK
FADE
COMP
SHUFFLE
5
6
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off.
VOL - PUSH ON
Turn control to raise or lower
volume.
Audio power can also be turned on
by pressing the AM/FM select
control or the TAPE/CD select
control.
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
Press the BASS control then press:
•
BASS
TREB
to decrease the bass output
and
•
to increase the bass output.
19
Entertainment Systems
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s treble output.
Press the TREB control then press:
•
BASS
TREB
BAL
FADE
to decrease the treble output
and
•
to increase the treble output.
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
Press the FADE control then press:
•
•
to shift the sound to the
front and
to shift the sound to the rear.
Seek function
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode.
Seek function in radio mode
to find the next
• Press
listenable station down the
frequency band.
• Press
to find the next listenable station up the frequency band.
Seek function in tape mode
• Press
to listen to the previous selection on the tape.
• Press
to listen to the next selection on the tape.
20
Entertainment Systems
Seek function in CD mode
to seek to the previous
• Press
track of the current disc. If a
selection has been playing for
three seconds or more and you press
, the audio system will replay
that selection from the beginning.
• Press
to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc
will automatically replay.
Scan function
The scan function works in radio,
tape or CD mode.
SCAN
Scan function in radio mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode.
Scan function in tape mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s
first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the
tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again.
Scan function in CD mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the
control again.
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio, tape and CD modes.
AM
FM
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in tape mode
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play.
21
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with
AM
FM
the AM/FM select control.
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune
adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns,
indicating the station is held in memory on the control you selected.
REW
FF
SIDE 1-2
1
2
3
4
COMP
SHUFFLE
5
6
Autoset memory preset
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips
when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autoset memory preset
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls.
2. Press the control.
3. When the first six strong stations
AUTO
are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start
playing.
CLK
If there are less than six strong
stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset
controls will all store the last strong station available.
22
Entertainment Systems
These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls
(until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner as your original
presets.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set
memory stations, press the AUTO control again.
Setting the clock
To set the hour, press and hold the
CLK control and press SEEK:
AUTO
CLK
•
to decrease hours and
•
to increase hours.
To set the minute, press and hold
the CLK control and press TUNE:
AUTO
CLK
•
to decrease minutes and
to increase minutes.
•
The CLK control will allow you to
switch between media display mode
AUTO
(radio station, stereo information,
etc.) and clock display mode (time).
When in clock mode, the media
information will display for 10
CLK
seconds, when the radio is turned
on, and then revert to clock
information. Any time that the
media is changed, (new radio station, etc.), the media information will
again display for 10 seconds before reverting back to the clock. In media
mode, the media information will always be displayed.
23
Entertainment Systems
Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
to move to the next
• Press
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
• Press
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.
Tape/CD select
• To begin tape play (with a tape
loaded into the audio system)
TAPE
CD
while in the radio or CD mode,
press the TAPE control. Press
again during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast forward
function.
• To begin CD play (if CD(s) are
loaded), press the CD control.
TAPE
CD
The first track of the disc will
begin playing. If returning from
radio or tape mode, CD play will begin where it stopped last.
Press the CD control to toggle between single CD and CD changer play
(if equipped).
Rewind
The rewind control works in tape
REW
and CD modes.
1
• In tape mode, radio play will
continue until rewind is stopped
(with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached.
• In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the
current track.
24
Entertainment Systems
Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
tape and CD modes.
• In the tape mode, tape direction
will automatically reverse when
the end of the tape is reached.
FF
2
• In CD mode, pressing the control fast forwards the CD within the
current track.
Tape direction select
Press to play the alternate side of
the tape.
Eject function
Press the EJ control to stop and
eject a tape.
SIDE 1-2
3
EJ
Press the EJ control to stop and
eject a CD.
EJ
Dolby姞 noise reduction
Dolby威 noise reduction operates in
tape mode. Dolby威 noise reduction
reduces the amount of hiss and
static during tape playback.
Press the
reduction.
4
control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolby威 noise
Dolby威 noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby威
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby威” and the double-D
are registered trademarks of Dolby威 Laboratories Licensing
symbol
Corporation.
25
Entertainment Systems
Compression adjust
Compression adjust brings soft and
loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
Press the COMP control to activate
and deactivate compression adjust.
COMP
5
Shuffle feature
The shuffle feature operates in CD
SHUFFLE
mode and plays all tracks on the
6
current disc in random order.
Press the SHUFFLE control to start
this feature. Random order play will continue until the SHUFFLE control
is pressed again.
Mute mode
Press the MUTE control to mute the
playing media. Press the MUTE
control again to return to the
playing media.
EJ
MUTE
26
Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD (LATE
AVAILABILITY)
1. Tape eject control
2. CD eject control
3. Bass/treble control
4. Balance/fade control
5. Compression (preset 5) / shuffle
control (preset 6)
6. Select control
7. Side direction (preset 3) / Dolby
control (preset 4)
8. Rewind (preset 1) / fast forward
control (preset 2)
9. RDS/Mute control
10. Autoset control
11. Scan control
12. Seek control
13. Tune control
14. AM/FM/CD control
15. Power/volume control
16. Tape control
17. CD door
18. Cassette door
27
Entertainment Systems
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off.
Turn control to raise or lower
volume.
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
Audio power can also be turned on by pressing the AM/FM select control
or the TAPE/CD select control.
Speed sensitive volume
With this feature, radio volume automatically changes slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1
through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
With the radio on, press and hold
the volume control for five seconds,
until the display reads SPEED VOL,
then press:
•
to increase volume
compensation
•
to decrease or shut off the
volume compensation
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio, tape and CD modes.
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in tape mode
Press this control to stop tape play and begin radio play.
28
Entertainment Systems
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Tune adjust
The tune control works in radio mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
to move to the next
• Press
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the
control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
• Press
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.
Seek function
The seek function control works in radio, tape or CD mode.
Seek function in radio mode
to find the next
• Press
listenable station down the
frequency band.
to find the next
• Press
listenable station up the
frequency band.
Seek function in tape mode
• Press
to listen to the previous selection on the tape.
• Press
to listen to the next selection on the tape.
Seek function in CD mode
• Press
to seek to the previous
track of the disc. If a selection
has been playing for three
seconds or more and you
, the CD will replay that
press
selection from the beginning.
• Press
to seek forward to the next track of the disc. After the last
track has been completed, the first track of the current disc will
automatically replay.
29
Entertainment Systems
Scan function
The scan function works in radio,
tape or CD mode.
Scan function in radio mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the control again to stop the scan mode.
Scan function in tape mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
tape. (The tape scans in a forward direction. At the end of the tape’s
first side, direction automatically reverses to the opposite side of the
tape.) To stop on a particular selection, press the control again.
Scan function in CD mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the
control again.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with
the AM/FM select control.
2. Select a station. Refer to Tune
adjust or Seek function for more information on selecting a station.
3. Press and hold a memory preset control until the sound returns and
the display reads PRESET SAVED. This indicates the station is held in
memory on the control you selected.
Autoset memory preset
Autoset allows you to set strong radio stations without losing your
original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful on trips
when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
30
Entertainment Systems
Starting autoset memory preset
1. Select a frequency using the AM/FM select controls.
2. Press the control.
3. When the first six strong stations
are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start
playing.
If there are less than six strong stations available on the frequency band,
the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong
station available.
These stations are temporarily stored in the memory preset controls
(until deactivated) and are accessed in the same manner as your original
presets.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set
memory stations, press the AUTO control again.
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
Press the BASS control then press:
•
to decrease the bass output
and
•
to increase the bass output.
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s treble output.
Press the TREB control then press:
•
to decrease the treble output
and
•
to increase the treble output.
31
Entertainment Systems
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left
speakers.
Press the BAL control then press:
•
to shift sound to the left and
•
to shift sound to the right.
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
Press the FADE control then press:
•
•
to shift the sound to the
front and
to shift the sound to the rear.
Tape/CD select
• To begin tape play (with a tape
loaded into the audio system)
while in the radio or CD mode,
press the TAPE control. Press
again during rewind or fast forward to stop the rewind or fast forward
function.
• To begin CD play (if a CD is
loaded), press the CD control.
The first track of the disc will
begin playing. If returning from
radio or tape mode, CD play will begin where it stopped last.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75
in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
32
Entertainment Systems
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
Rewind
The rewind control works in tape
and CD modes.
• In tape mode, radio play will
continue until rewind is stopped
(with the TAPE control) or the beginning of the tape is reached.
• In CD mode, pressing the REW control rewinds the CD within the
current track.
Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
tape and CD modes.
• In the tape mode, tape direction
will automatically reverse when
the end of the tape is reached.
• In CD mode, pressing the FF control fast forwards the CD within the
current track.
Tape direction select
Press to play the alternate side of
the tape.
Eject function
Press the EJ control to stop and
eject a tape.
Press the EJ control to stop and
eject a CD.
33
Entertainment Systems
Dolby姞 noise reduction
Dolby威 noise reduction operates in
tape mode. Dolby威 noise reduction
reduces the amount of hiss and
static during tape playback.
Press the
reduction.
control to activate (and deactivate) the Dolby威 noise
Dolby威 noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby威
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “Dolby威” and the double-D
are registered trademarks of Dolby威 Laboratories Licensing
symbol
Corporation.
Compression adjust
Compression adjust brings soft and
loud CD passages together for a
more consistent listening level.
Press the COMP control to activate
and deactivate compression adjust.
Shuffle feature
The shuffle feature operates in CD
mode and plays all tracks on the
current disc in random order.
Press to start this feature. Random
order play will continue until the control is pressed again.
Setting the clock with radio data system (RDS) feature
Press the RDS control until SELECT
HOUR or SELECT MINS is
displayed.
Use the SEL control to manually set
the time.
•
to decrease hours/minutes
and
•
34
to increase hours/minutes.
Entertainment Systems
Radio data system (RDS) feature
This feature allows your audio system to receive station identification or
program type from RDS-equipped FM radio stations.
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) recommend that FM radio
broadcasters use RDS technology to transmit information. FM radio
stations are independently operated and individually elect to use RDS
technology to transmit station ID and program type as desired.
Press the RDS control until RDS ON
or RDS OFF appears in the display.
Use the SEL control to enable (ON)
or disable (OFF) the feature. With
the RDS activated, press the SEL control to scroll through the following
selections:
Traffic
• Press the RDS control until
TRAFFIC is displayed.
• Use the SEL control to select ON
or OFF. With the feature on, use
the SEEK or SCAN control to
find a radio station broadcasting a
traffic report (if it is broadcasting
RDS data).
This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic
announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the
volume (using the volume control) to the desired level. The volume level
will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic
announcements will be at the selected volume level.
Traffic information is not available in most U.S. markets.
Program type
• Press the RDS control until the
FIND program type is displayed.
35
Entertainment Systems
• Use the SEL control to select the
program type. With the feature
on, use the SEEK or SCAN
control to find the desired
program type from the following
selections:
•
Classic
• Country
• Info
• Jazz
• Oldies
Show
• With RDS activated, press the
RDS control until SHOW is
displayed.
• Use the SEL control to select
TYPE (the display shows the
program type), NAME (the
display shows the call letters of
the station) or FREQ.
•
•
•
•
•
R&B
Religious
Rock
Soft
Top 40
Mute mode
Press the MUTE control to mute the
playing media. Press the MUTE
control again to return to the
playing media.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Reverse Sensing System, the
audio volume, (if set above a certain level), will be lowered to a preset
value when the Reverse Sensing System tone is sounded.
36
Entertainment Systems
AUDIOPHILE AM/FM STEREO IN DASH SIX CD RADIO
37
Entertainment Systems
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO IN DASH SIX CD RADIO
15 16
17
1
SHUF
DISC
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN
3
4
COMP
MUTE
2
REW
FF
5
EJ
LOAD
14
6
BASS
13
BAL
7
SEL
TREB
FADE
PUSH ON
8
AM
FM
CD
1
2
12 11
1. Seek control
2. Rewind/fast forward control
3. DSP (Digital Signal Processing)
— Audiophile system / COMP
(Compression) — Premium System
4. Phone/Mute control
5. Eject control
6. Bass / Treble control
7. Select control
8. Balance/Fade control
9. Menu control
38
3
4
5
6
10
MENU
9
10. Radio preset and CD select
controls
11. CD control
12. AM/FM control
13. On/Off/Volume control
14. CD Load control
15. CD shuffle control
16. Scan control
17. Disc/Tune control
Entertainment Systems
Volume/power control
Press the control to turn the audio
system on or off. The audio system
can also be turned on by pressing
the AM/FM control or the CD
control.
PUSH ON
Turn the control to raise or lower volume.
If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off,
the volume will come back on at a “nominal” listening level when the
ignition switch is turned back on.
Speed sensitive volume
With this feature, radio volume changes automatically and slightly with
vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise.
The recommended level for speed sensitive volume is from level 1
through level 3. Level 0 turns the speed sensitive volume off and level 7
is the maximum setting.
To engage the speed sensitive
volume feature, press and hold the
volume control for five seconds
PUSH ON
(with the radio on). SPEED VOL
will appear in the display, then
press:
•
to increase volume
compensation.
SEL
•
to decrease or shut off the
volume compensation.
The selected level will appear in the
display.
Bass adjust
The bass adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s bass output.
Press the BASS control. Use the
SEL control to increase or decrease
the amount of bass.
BASS
+
SEL
TREB
39
Entertainment Systems
Treble adjust
The treble adjust control allows you
to increase or decrease the audio
system’s treble output.
Press the TREB control. Use the
SEL control to increase or decrease
the amount of treble.
Speaker balance adjust
Speaker sound distribution can be
adjusted between the right and left
speakers.
Press the BAL control. Use the SEL
control to adjust the sound between
the left and right speakers.
Speaker fade adjust
Speaker sound can be adjusted
between the front and rear
speakers.
Press the FADE control. Use the
SEL control to adjust the sound
between the front and rear speakers.
BASS
+
SEL
+
SEL
+
SEL
TREB
BAL
FADE
BAL
FADE
Seek function
The seek function works in radio or CD mode.
Seek function in radio mode
to find the next
• Press
listenable station down the
frequency band. SEEK DOWN
will display.
to find the next listenable station up the frequency band.
• Press
SEEK UP will display.
40
Entertainment Systems
Seek function in CD mode
to seek to the previous
• Press
track of the current disc. If the
beginning of the disc is reached,
the CD player seeks to the
beginning of the last track on the current disc and begins playing.
• Press
to seek forward to the next track of the current disc. After
the last track has been completed, the first track of the current disc
will automatically replay.
Scan function
The scan function works in radio or
CD mode.
Scan function in radio mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a brief sampling of all listenable stations
on the frequency band. Press the SCAN control again to stop the scan
mode.
Scan function in CD mode
Press the SCAN control to hear a short sampling of all selections on the
CD. (The CD scans in a forward direction, wrapping back to the first
track at the end of the CD.) To stop on a particular selection, press the
control again.
AM/FM select
The AM/FM select control works in
radio and CD modes.
AM
FM
CD
AM/FM select in radio mode
This control allows you to select AM or FM frequency bands. Press the
control to switch between AM, FM1 or FM2 memory preset stations.
AM/FM select in CD mode
Press this control to stop CD play and begin radio play.
Radio station memory preset
The radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls. These
controls can be used to select up to six preset AM stations and twelve
FM stations (six in FM1 and six in FM2).
41
Entertainment Systems
Setting memory preset stations
1. Select the frequency band with the AM/FM select control. Press the
AM/FM control to toggle between AM, FM1, or FM2.
2. Press the SEEK control to access the next listenable station up or
down the frequency band. Press the TUNE control to go up or down the
listening band in individual increments.
3. Select a station. Refer to Seek function for more information on
selecting a station.
4. Press and hold a memory preset control. The playing media will mute
momentarily. When the sound returns, the station is held in memory on
the control you selected. The display will read SAVED.
Autostore (Autoset)
Autostore allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without
losing your original manually set preset stations. This feature is helpful
on trips when you travel between cities with different radio stations.
Starting autostore (Autoset)
1. Press and momentarily hold the AM/FM control.
2. AUTOSET will flash in the display
as the frequency band is scrolled
through.
AM
FM
CD
3. When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in
memory preset control 1 will start playing.
If there are fewer than six strong stations available on the frequency
band, the remaining memory preset controls will all store the last strong
station available.
To deactivate autoset and return to your audio system’s manually set
memory stations, press the AM/FM control again.
42
Entertainment Systems
Setting the clock
Press the MENU control until
SELECT HOUR or SELECT
MINUTE is displayed. (The menu
mode must be engaged to enable
clock mode).
Use the SEL control to manually set
the time.
to increase
• Press
hours/minutes.
SEL
to decrease
• Press
hours/minutes.
Press the MENU control again to disengage the clock mode.
Tune/disc adjust
The tune control works in radio or CD mode.
Tune adjust in radio mode
to move to the next
• Press
DISC
TUNE
frequency down the band
(whether or not a listenable
station is located there). Hold the control to move through the
frequencies quickly.
to move to the next frequency up the band (whether or not
• Press
a listenable station is located there). Hold for quick movement.
Disc adjust for CD mode
• Press
to select the previous
DISC
TUNE
disc. (Play will begin on the first
track of the disc unless shuffle
mode is engaged.) Refer to Shuffle feature for more information. Hold
the control to continue reversing through the discs.
to select the next disc. Hold the control to fast-forward
• Press
through the remaining discs.
43
Entertainment Systems
CD select
CD mode may be entered by
AM
CD
pressing the CD control and the
FM
LOAD control. Load the CD into the
audio system. The first track of the
disc will begin playing. After that, CD play will begin where it stopped
last.
If an alternative CD is desired, press the corresponding preset control
(1–6) of a loaded CD, or press the DISC control to access the other
loaded CDs.
NO CD will display if the CD control is activated when there is not a CD
present in the audio system.
NO CD will illuminate in the display if the CD control and a present
number (that is currently empty) are pressed. The system will play the
next available disc.
If your vehicle is equipped with a CD changer, pressing the CD control
again will allow you to toggle between accessing the multi disc system
and the CD changer. The display will read CD or CDDJ.
Display description
Six circles are always lit in the digital display. These signify the six CD
slots in the audio system. When a disc is loaded into a particular slot
(1–6), the number inside that specific circle lights. If the circle is empty,
there is no CD in that particular slot.
Rewind
The rewind control works in CD
REW
FF
modes.
Press and hold the REW control
until the desired selection is reached. If the beginning of the disc is
reached, the CD will begin play at the first track. Release the control to
disengage rewind mode.
When in rewind mode, your audio system will automatically lower the
volume level of the playing media.
Fast forward
The fast forward control works in
CD modes.
44
REW
FF
Entertainment Systems
Press and hold the FF control until the desired selection is reached. If
the end of the disc is reached, the CD will return to the first track.
Release the control to disengage fast forward mode.
When in fast forward mode, your audio system will automatically lower
the volume level of the playing media.
Load
The load feature allows you to load
LOAD
single CDs into the player internal
to the radio.
This six disc CD player is equipped with a CD door. Compact
discs should only be inserted into the player after the door has
been opened by the player. Do not attempt to force the door
open. Compact discs should only be loaded by pressing the LOAD
control.
Press the LOAD control. (You can choose which slot will be loaded by
pressing the desired preset number. If you do not choose a slot, the
system will choose the next available one.) Wait until the CD door opens.
Load the CD into the player. AUTOLOAD CD# is displayed. When the CD
has been loaded, the door will close and the CD will begin to play. For
example, to load a CD into slot 2, press the LOAD control and then press
preset 2. This feature may be used when the ignition is on or off.
Auto load
This feature allows you to auto load
LOAD
up to 6 discs into the multi disc CD
player internal to the radio.
Press and hold the LOAD control until AUTOLOAD # is displayed. The
CD door will open. Load the desired discs, one at a time. The CD is
loaded into position and the audio system will display CD#. Each time
the CD door opens, INSERT CD# is displayed. The door will close and
the player will move to the next slot after each disc has been loaded.
The process is repeated until all 6 slots are full. The audio system plays
the last CD loaded and the display is updated. If some slots are already
full and autoload is activated, the system will fill all empty slots.
Eject
Press the EJ control to stop and
EJ
eject a CD. You can choose which
CD will be ejected by pressing the
EJ control and the desired preset number (1–6). For example, to eject
45
Entertainment Systems
CD 2, press the EJ control and then press the preset 2 control. If you do
not choose a specific CD, the player will eject the current CD.
If a CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the
player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when
the ignition is ON or OFF.
Auto eject
Press and momentarily hold the EJ
EJ
control to engage auto eject. AUTO
EJECT will appear in the display. All
CDs which are present in the player will be ejected one at a time. If a
CD is ejected and not removed from the door of the CD player, the
player will automatically reload the CD. This feature may be used when
the ignition is ON or OFF.
Shuffle feature
Press the SHUF control until the
desired shuffle mode is displayed.
The audio system will then engage
the desired shuffle mode.
When engaged, the shuffle feature has two different modes: SHUFFLE
DISC and SHUFFLE TRK.
SHUFFLE DISC randomly plays tracks from all the discs presently in the
audio system.
SHUFFLE TRK plays all the tracks on the current disc in random order.
Compression feature
The compression feature operates in
CD mode and brings soft and loud
CD passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
MENU
+
SEL
On Audiophile audios, press the MENU control until compression status
is displayed. Press the SEL control to enable the compression feature
when COMP OFF is displayed. Press the SEL control again to disable the
feature when COMP ON is displayed.
On Premium audios, press the
COMP control until COMP ON is
displayed.
46
Entertainment Systems
Menu mode
The MENU control allows you to
access many different features
within your audio system. There are
three sets of menus available
depending upon which mode or feature is activated.
While in FM mode, two menus are available. If RDS is turned OFF, you
can access the following:
• SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock.
• SELECT MINUTES — Refer to Setting the clock.
• RDS OFF — Refer to Radio data system feature.
If RDS is turned ON, you can access the following:
• TRAFFIC ON/OFF-Refer to Traffic announcements.
• FIND type-Refer to Program type.
• SHOW (NAME, TYPE, NONE)- Refer to Radio data system feature.
• RDS ON— Refer to Radio data system feature.
• SELECT HOURS — Refer to Setting the clock.
• SELECT MINUTES —Refer to Setting the clock.
When in CD mode, you can access: SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES
or COMP ON/OFF.
SELECT HOURS, SELECT MINUTES— Allows you to adjust the hours
and minutes. Refer to Setting the clock.
TRAFFIC ON/OFF— Traffic announcements can be programmed as local
or distant. Refer to Traffic announcements.
RDS ON/OFF— This feature allows your audio system to receive text
information from RDS-equipped FM radio stations. Refer to Radio Data
System feature.
FIND type — Allows you to select your desired FM program type and
search for that selection.
SHOW — Allows you to select from NAME (displays the name of the
radio station), TYPE (displays the RDS program type: rock, jazz, etc.), or
NONE (deactivates the RDS display).
47
Entertainment Systems
Traffic announcements
This feature allows you to hear
traffic announcements. When in this
MENU
+ SEL
mode, traffic announcements will
interrupt radio and CD play.
When in FM mode and RDS is
activated, press the MENU until TRAFFIC OFF displays. Press the SEL
control to engage the feature. The display will read TRAFFIC ON.
This feature also allows you to control the volume of traffic
announcements. With the display reading TRAFFIC ON, adjust the
volume using the volume control to the desired level. The volume level
will show at the bottom of the display. Interrupting traffic
announcements will be at the selected volume level.
To disengage the feature, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON
displays. Press the SEL control. The display will read TRAFFIC OFF.
RDS traffic seek feature
When in traffic mode, you can use the SEEK feature to seek up or down
the listenable traffic capable frequencies.
With the RDS activated, press MENU until TRAFFIC ON is displayed.
Press and hold the SEEK control until the desired selection is reached.
The feature disengages when the control is released.
RDS traffic scan feature
When in traffic mode, you can use the SCAN feature to scan up the
frequency band for listenable traffic capable frequencies.
With the RDS activated, press the MENU control until TRAFFIC ON is
displayed. Press the SCAN control. SCAN TRAFFIC will display. The
audio system will scan to all traffic capable frequencies. If no valid
stations are found after one pass, the scan function is cancelled and NOT
FOUND displays.
Traffic announcements are not available in most U.S. markets.
Radio data system (RDS) feature
This feature allows your audio
system to receive text information
from RDS-equipped FM radio
stations.
48
MENU
+
SEL
Entertainment Systems
To activate RDS:
• When in FM mode, press the MENU control until RDS OFF displays.
• Press the SEL control to engage this feature (RDS ON).
RDS features:
Once the RDS feature is on, press the MENU control to scroll through
the following selections:
Traffic announcements
This feature allows you to hear traffic announcements broadcast by
traffic capable RDS stations. For further information on traffic
announcements, refer to Traffic announcements in this chapter.
Program type
This feature allows you to search for RDS stations selectively by their
program type.
Press the MENU control until FIND
program type is displayed.
MENU
+ SEL
Use the SEL control to select the
program type. With the feature on,
use the SEEK or SCAN control to
find the desired program type from the following selections:
•
Classic
• R&B
• Country
• Religious
• Info
• Rock
• Jazz
• Soft
• Oldies
• Top 40
Show
This feature allows you to select the
type of RDS broadcast information
MENU
+ SEL
the radio will regularly show in the
display.
49
Entertainment Systems
With RDS activated, press the
MENU control until SHOW is
MENU
+ SEL
displayed.
Use the SEL control to select TYPE
(displays the RDS program type:
rock, jazz, etc), NAME (displays the name of the radio station) or NONE
(deactivates the RDS display).
Digital signal processing (Audiophile only)
The digital signal processing (DSP) feature allows you to change the
signal mode to suit your listening tastes.
Press the DSP control to access one
of the following modes:
DSP
SEL
+
• DSP OFF
• SIGNAL MODE
• OCCUPANCY MODE
Use the SEL control to select the
SEL
desired signal mode (the selected
mode will appear in the display). The following signal modes can be
selected:
• DSP OFF—disengages the feature
• NEWS—”voice-only” type of sound with a limited audio band
• JAZZ CLUB—jazz club with clearly reflected sounds
• HALL—rectangular concert hall capacity of about 2 000
• CHURCH—church with a high vault
• STADIUM—outdoor stadium with a capacity of about 30 000
Press the DSP control again to access the occupancy modes. Use the
SEL control to optimize the sound based upon the occupants in the
vehicle. The following occupancy modes can be selected:
• ALL SEATS - Gives the best sound quality possible to all occupants.
• DRIVER SEAT - Optimizes sound quality for the driver.
• REAR SEATS - Optimizes sound quality for the rear seat passengers.
50
Entertainment Systems
Mute mode
Press the control to mute the
playing media. Press the control
again to return to the playing media.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with Reverse Sensing System, the
audio volume, (if set above a certain level), will be lowered to a preset
value when the Reverse Sensing System tone is sounded.
REAR SEAT RADIO CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is equipped with a
- VOLUME
front row console, then it is also
equipped with rear seat radio
controls. This feature allows front
SEEK
and middle seat passengers to listen
to different media sources (radio,
cassette, CD or DVD)
simultaneously. (However, the front
and middle-seat passengers cannot
listen to two different radio stations
at the same time.)
+
MODE
MEMORY
When the rear seat controls are activated, rear seat passengers can use
the controls to change the playing media for all passengers (Single Play
mode). In this mode, all speakers will play audio from the same media
source for all passengers to hear. To activate the rear seat radio controls:
• Press the memory preset controls
3 and 5 at the same time. A
) will
headphone icon (
illuminate in the radio display, indicating the rear seat radio controls
are active.
• Press memory preset controls 3 and 5 a second time to deactivate the
) will turn off in the radio
rear seat controls. The headphone icon (
display.
If there is a discrepancy between the rear seat controls and the front
audio controls (such as both trying to listen to the same playing media),
the front audio system will receive the desired selection.
51
Entertainment Systems
To activate Dual Play mode (rear
- VOLUME +
MODE
seat passengers listen to a different
playing media than the front seat
passengers):
SEEK
MEMORY
• Press the speaker/headphone
control.
• Press the MODE control to
change audio sources (for
headphone mode only)
• Use the SEEK, VOLUME and
MEMORY controls to make adjustments to the playing media.
• Dual Play mode may also be
1
2
3
4
5
activated by pressing memory
presets 2 and 4 simultaneously on
the front audio controls.
6
The rear speakers mute and rear seat passengers have audio (for their
selected media) available through their headphones.
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME
The volume control allows the rear seat passengers to adjust the volume
level of the audio system.
Press the + control to increase
- VOLUME +
MODE
volume.
Press the - control to decrease
volume.
SEEK
MEMORY
From the rear seat controls, volume control can be set no higher than
the current radio setting unless the speakers are turned off.
52
Entertainment Systems
TURNING THE REAR SPEAKERS ON AND OFF
Press the headphone/speaker
- VOLUME
control to turn the rear speakers on
(Single Play mode) or off (Dual Play
mode).
+
SEEK
MODE
MEMORY
USING HEADPHONES/DUAL PLAY MODE
jack. Press the
Plug a 3.5 mm headphone (not included) into the
speaker on/off control to operate the headphones. DUAL PLAY
illuminates in the radio display and the fade control is disabled, signaling
that Dual Play has been activated.
The rear speakers will cut out once the speaker on/off control is pressed.
The front speaker will remain playing for the front passengers. Press the
control again to deactivate the headphones. SINGLE PLAY illuminates in
the radio display and the fade control is enabled, signaling that Dual Play
mode has been deactivated.
To enable Dual Play, the rear seat controls must be active and
illuminated in the radio display.
MODE SELECT
Push the MODE control to toggle
between AM, FM1, FM2, tape (if
equipped), CD, CD changer (if
equipped) or DVD (if equipped). If
in Dual Play mode, SHARED
illuminates in the radio display when
the front and rear modes are set to
the same media.
- VOLUME +
MODE
SEEK
MEMORY
53
Entertainment Systems
MEMORY PRESET CONTROL
Push the MEMORY control
successively to allow rear seat
passengers to scroll through the 6
memory presets in AM, FM1 or
FM2.
Push the MEMORY control in CD
mode (if equipped) to advance to
the next disc.
- VOLUME +
MODE
SEEK
MEMORY
- VOLUME +
MODE
SEEK FUNCTION
to find
• In radio mode, press
the next listenable station down
the frequency band.
to find
• In radio mode, press
SEEK
MEMORY
the next listenable station up the
frequency band.
• In tape mode (if equipped), use
the SEEK function to access the
or previous
next
selection.
• In CD mode (if equipped), use the SEEK function to access the
or previous
selection.
next
PARENTAL CONTROL
Press the memory preset controls 3
and 5 simultaneously on the front
audio controls to disable the rear
seat controls. They will remain disabled until the front seat passengers
“enable” them again by simultaneously pressing the 3 and 5 preset
controls. The settings of the front seat controls will always override
those of the rear seat controls.
54
Entertainment Systems
TROUBLESHOOTING THE CD PLAYER / CHANGER (IF EQUIPPED)
If sound skips:
• You may be traveling on a rough road, playing badly scratched discs or
the disc may be dirty. Skipping will not scratch the discs or damage
the player.
If your changer/player does not work, it may be that:
• The disc is inserted with the label surface downward.
• A disc is already loaded where you want to insert a disc.
• The disc is dusty or defective.
• A disc with format and dimensions not within industry standards is
inserted.
CLEANING COMPACT DISCS
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to
the edge. Do not use circular motion.
CD AND CD CHANGER CARE
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
• Do not insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer
magazine.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75
in) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
55
Entertainment Systems
CLEANING CASSETTE PLAYER (IF EQUIPPED)
Clean the tape player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after 10 to
12 hours of play in order to maintain the best sound and operation.
CASSETTE AND CASSETTE PLAYER CARE
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Do not expose tapes to direct sunlight, high humidity, extreme heat or
extreme cold. Allow tapes that may have been exposed to extreme
temperatures to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Do not leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not
being played.
RADIO FREQUENCY INFORMATION
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission(CRTC) establish the frequencies
AM and FM stations may use for their broadcasts. Allowable frequencies
are:
AM 530, 540–1600, 1610 kHz
FM 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Not all frequencies are used in a given area.
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
Three factors can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength. The further an FM signal travels, the weaker it is.
The listenable range of the average FM station is approximately 40 km
(24 miles). This range can be affected by “signal modulation.” Signal
modulation is a process radio stations use to increase their
strength/volume relative to other stations.
• Terrain. Hills, mountains and tall buildings between your vehicle’s
antenna and the radio station signal can cause FM reception problems.
Static can be caused on AM stations by power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms. Moving away from an interfering
structure (out of its “shadow”) returns your reception to normal.
• Station overload. Weak signals are sometimes captured by stronger
signals when you pass a broadcast tower. A stronger signal may
temporarily overtake a weaker signal and play while the weak station
frequency is displayed.
56
Entertainment Systems
The audio system automatically switches to single channel reception if it
will improve the reception of a station normally received in stereo.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTIES AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information.
If service is necessary, see your dealer or a qualified technician.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Seat Entertainment DVD
System which allows you to watch DVDs, play music CDs and to plug in
and play video game systems. Please review this material to become
familiar with the system features and safety information.
DVD player controls
7
8
9
1
2
V
L
DISP
REV
R
AUX
MENU
6
5
+
NEXT
PREV
FWD
DIM
ENTER
-
4
3
1. MAIN control
• NEXT — Press to access the next track on the CD, the next chapter
on the DVD, or to go up in cursor mode.
• PREV — Press to access the previous track on the CD, the previous
chapter on the DVD, or to go down in cursor mode.
• REV — Press to reverse in CD and DVD play modes or to move the
cursor left in the menu active mode.
• FWD —Press to advance in CD and DVD play modes or to move the
cursor right in the menu active mode.
2. PLAY/PAUSE control
Press to playback or pause the DVD.
57
Entertainment Systems
3. DIM control
Adjust to increase (+) or decrease (-) the amount of brightness on the
screen.
4. ENTER control
Press to select the function pointed to within the active menu. May also
be used by some user interactive discs during movie play.
5. MENU control
Press to bring up the disc menu.
6. AUX control
Press to switch DVD player from play mode to auxiliary mode.
7. Auxiliary jacks
Insert lines for standard video game players.
8. STOP/EJECT control
Press once to stop DVD play. Press again to eject the DVD.
9. DISPLAY (DISP) control
Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display
adjustments.
DVD control features
Menu control
Press the MENU control to enter
into MENU mode. This allows you to
move and choose within the DVD
generated menu structure. Once in
MENU mode:
• Press the NEXT control to move
the cursor one position upward
REV
58
NEXT
PREV
FWD
Entertainment Systems
• Press the PREV control to move
the cursor one position downward
REV
NEXT
PREV
FWD
• Press the REV control to move
the cursor left one position
REV
• Press the FWD control to move
the cursor right one position
REV
NEXT
PREV
FWD
NEXT
PREV
FWD
Next/Previous control
The NEXT (up) and PREV (down)
controls allow you to access the
NEXT
REV
FWD
next or previous track on a CD or
PREV
chapter on a DVD. When pressed,
the playing audio will mute
momentarily while the next chapter
is accessed. Press and hold to advance or reverse multiple tracks or
chapters.
REV/ FWD control
Press the REV/FWD control during
playback mode to reverse or
advance at a normal speed. Press
the REV/FWD control again to
disengage the reverse/advance
action and return to normal
playback mode
NEXT
REV
PREV
FWD
59
Entertainment Systems
Enter control
The ENTER control allows you to
select items when in MENU mode.
Press the ENTER control to select
the desired highlighted item.
CD play mode
Press NEXT during CD play to
advance to the next track. If you
press NEXT during the last track,
the system will wrap around to the
first track and begin play.
ENTER
REV
NEXT
PREV
FWD
Slow play mode
To enter slow play mode, press the
PLAY/PAUSE control. Once the
system is in pause mode, press the
FWD or REV control for slow motion playback. Three different speeds
are available depending on how long the control is held. Press the
control once for slow motion playback. Press the control again to
disengage slow motion playback. Press the control a third time to return
to normal playback mode.
User menu mode
To adjust the display setting, press
DISP
DISP once and the player menu will
appear. Press DISP again to adjust
the display setting. Use the arrow controls and the ENTER controls to
select the various screen settings. (Available screen selections are 16x9,
Normal, 4x3 and Zoom).
The DVD player will read the disc type and configure the display
accordingly. Some movies have a wide screen movie format to fit a
normal 4x3 screen. In this case, the movie will have black bars on the
top and bottom. When shown on the screen, it may appear as a small
screen within the wide screen. It may be desirable to view this type of
movie in zoom mode. To enter zoom mode, press DISP once for the
player menu and again to adjust the display setting. Select zoom from
the screen settings by using the arrow and ENTER controls.
60
Entertainment Systems
Remote control
1
2
REV
8
FWD
3
+
VOL
-
SEEK
4
DISP
MNU
ENT
MODE
MEMORY
5
7
6
1. REWIND control
Press to reverse the direction of the DVD movie.
2. FAST FORWARD control
Press to advance the direction of the DVD movie.
3. PLAY/STOP control
Press to play or stop the DVD movie.
4. SEEK control
Press to reverse or advance the chapter of the DVD or the track of the
CD.
5. DISPLAY (DISP) control
Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display
adjustments. Once the display is on, use SEEK to choose the desired
screen setting.
6. ENTER (ENT) MEMORY control
In DVD playback mode, press the control to select a designated item in
menu mode.
In stop mode, press the control to select the next memory preset.
7. MNU/MODE control
In DVD playback mode, press to access the disc menu.
61
Entertainment Systems
In stop mode, press to change to rear seat mode (i.e. AM, FM, CD . . . )
8. VOLUME control
Press to increase (+) or decrease (-) volume level.
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the
remote control unit. Since all
batteries have a limited shelf life,
replace them when the unit fails to
control the DVD player. There is a
LED indicator light on the remote
control that will illuminate when any
control is pressed.
Slide the battery cover off as shown on the remote control to access the
batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries.
Parental control
To enable or disable your Rear Seat
Entertainment DVD System,
simultaneously press the memory
preset controls 3 and 5 on the front audio control.
For further information about the Rear Seat Controls, refer to Rear Seat
Controls in this chapter.
62
Entertainment Systems
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) flip-down screen
The screen rotates down to view and up into housing to store when not
in use. Be sure the screen is latched into the housing when being stored.
1. 7.0” (diagonal) active matrix liquid crystal display (LCD) screen.
2. Screen housing.
3. Dimmer switch. Toggle to increase/decrease the brightness of the
screen.
Playback and format
• The DVD player of your Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System can
only be used in the “playback” mode. (The DVD player does not offer
a record feature.)
• The system plays standard CDs or DVDs.
• The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The
player is not compatible with CDR/RW media.
63
Entertainment Systems
Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System protection circuits
High temperature sensor circuit
• Excessively high temperatures may cause damage to the DVD player.
• When the temperature of the DVD player becomes too hot, the high
temperature sensor circuit stops machine operation. DVD/CD will
illuminate in the radio display.
General operating tips
• When the engine is not running, use the system sparingly otherwise it
will run the battery down.
• When the ignition is turned to OFF, the Rear Seat Entertainment DVD
System is also turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the
system will begin playback from the last selected media source when
the play control is pressed.
• To disable the DVD player, simultaneously press the 3 and 5 memory
presets on the radio face. To enable the DVD player again, press the 3
and 5 presets simultaneously.
• The DVD player is only capable of reading the bottom side of a disc.
When inserting a single sided disc, the label should be up. For a
multi-sided disc, the desired play side should be down when the disc
is inserted into the player.
• The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The
player is not compatible with CDR/RW media.
• DVDs are formatted by regions. This DVD system can only play region
1 DVDs (DVDs manufactured in U.S and Canada).
This unit is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75
in) audio compact discs and DVDs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford DVD/CD
players. Irregular shaped discs, discs with a scratch protection
film attached, and discs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels
should not be inserted into the player. The label may peel and
cause the disc to become jammed. It is recommended that
homemade discs be identified with permanent felt tip marker
rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage discs.
Please contact your dealer for further information.
64
Entertainment Systems
Inserting a CD/DVD
Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD player automatically turns the power
ON and playback should begin.
The counter is automatically reset to 0:00:00.
Ensure that the overhead screen is down for viewing.
Removing a CD/DVD
1. Press the STOP/EJECT control to stop playback.
2. Press the STOP/EJECT control again to eject the CD/DVD.
If the CD/DVD is not removed within the allotted time, the system will
pull the CD/DVD back into the system for safety purposes. If the
CD/DVD will not eject from the system, press and hold the EJECT
control for approximately 2 seconds. The disc should eject whether the
vehicle ignition is ON or OFF.
Playing a video game/auxiliary device
1. Connect the video line from your video game device to the YELLOW
auxiliary input jack.
2. Connect the left and right audio lines to the WHITE and RED auxiliary
input jacks respectively.
3. Press the MODE control until DVD/CD AUX (no disc in player) or
DVD/CD play (disc in player) illuminates in the radio display. If a disc is
in the system, playback should begin. To enable the aux inputs, press the
STOP control or press the AUX control on the DVD player.
65
Entertainment Systems
On-screen indicators
Each time a control is pressed, the operational status of the DVD player
is shown on the screen. The following are some possible indicators:
1. CD track
2. DVD chapter
3. SYSTEM COUNTER — displays current viewing time of desired media.
(HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS)
4. DVD/ CD STATUS (PLAY/FF/REW/PAUSE)
5. AUDIO OUTPUT (not changeable)
6. Subtitles (specific language type - English or Spanish, dependent of
disc capability and ON/OFF selection.)
7. Camera angle (of picture) - Adjustable with cursor controls and
ENTER control.
Safety information
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Rear Seat Entertainment
DVD System. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down
screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact
with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
66
Entertainment Systems
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Rear Seat
Entertainment DVD System.
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD layer with benzene, paint thinner or
any other solvent.
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Motor Company could
void user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference and radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players that are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
67
Entertainment Systems
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely
humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one. If
moisture condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the
player. If one is already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON
to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or
more.
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while
cleaning the screen.
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind
onto the media controls or into the videocassette player. If liquid is
accidentally spilled onto the system, immediately turn the system OFF
and consult a qualified service technician.
Cleaning compact discs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to
the edge. Do not use circular motion.
Cleaning the DVD player
Clean the exterior of the DVD player with a damp cloth. Do not use CD
cleaning kits or CDs intended to clean the interior of your DVD player.
Use of these products may damage your system.
68
Climate Controls
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Temperature control
2. Mode selector control
3. A/C control
4. Rear defrost control
5. Fan speed control
Fan speed control
Controls the volume of air circulated
in the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
69
Climate Controls
Temperature control knob
Controls the temperature of the
airflow inside the vehicle.
Mode selector control
Controls the direction of the airflow
to the inside of the vehicle.
The A/C compressor will only
function if the outside temperature
is above approximately 2°C (35°F)
MAX
A/C
• MAX A/C – Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
registers. Max A/C is noisier than A/C, but more economical and
efficient. This mode will reduce undesirable odors from entering the
vehicle. When placed in Max A/C, the A/C indicator will be illuminated
and cannot be manually disabled.
•
(Panel) – Distributes outside air through the instrument panel
registers. The system will allow some airflow through the floor ducts.
•
(Panel & Floor) — Distributes outside air through the
instrument panel registers and the floor ducts and side window
demisters. The air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly
warmer than that sent to the instrument panel registers.
• O (Off) – Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. This
mode will reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle but may
increase the possibility of interior window fogging.
•
70
(Floor) – Distributes outside air through the floor ducts and side
window demisters.
Climate Controls
•
(Floor & Defrost) – Distributes outside air through the floor
ducts, windshield defroster ducts and the side window demisters.
However, the A/C indicator will not be lit. The air distributed through
the floor ducts will be slightly warmer than that sent to the windshield
defroster ducts and the side window demisters.
•
(Defrost) – Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster ducts and the side window demisters. However, the A/C
indicator will not be lit. This mode will clear ice and fog from the
windshield.
Since the air conditioner removes moisture from the air, it is
considered normal operation if water drips on the ground under
the air conditioner drain.
A/C control
Used to manually enable or disable the operation of the air conditioning
in all modes except Floor & Defrost, Defrost and Max A/C.
When manual A/C is selected (On) the indicator will be lit. When manual
A/C is selected (Off) the indicator will not be lit.
In Floor & Defrost and Defrost, if the outside temperature is above
approximately 2°C (35°F), the air conditioner will automatically
dehumidify the air to reduce fogging. The A/C indicator will not
illuminate.
When placed in Max A/C, the A/C indicator will automatically illuminate
and cannot be manually disabled.
A/C
Operating tips
• To reduce fogging in humid weather conditions, unless in Defrost or
Floor and Defrost, press the A/C control before driving as the air
conditioning removes moisture from the air. To reduce humidity
buildup inside the vehicle under warm weather conditions, do not
drive with the climate control system in the Off mode.
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle under cold weather
conditions, do not drive with the climate control system in Max A/C or
Off mode.
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave your vehicle in the
Max A/C or Off mode when turning off the vehicle.
• Under snowy or dirty weather conditions, leave your vehicle in the
Max A/C or Off mode when turning off the ignition.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the exterior base of the
windshield.
71
Climate Controls
• To increase the efficiency of the A/C, drive with the windows slightly
open for two to three minutes after start up or until the vehicle has
been “aired out”.
• Do not place objects under the front seat or over the defroster ducts.
They may reduce visibility, fall into the ducts, or degrade the
performance of your climate control system.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC)
SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. A/C control
8. Floor control
2. Recirculated air control
9. Panel & Floor control
3. Fahrenheit/Celsius control
10. Panel control
4. Rear defrost control
11. OFF control
5. Exterior temperature control
12. AUTO control
6. Defrost control (front
13. Temperature control
windshield)
14. Fan speed control
7. Floor & Defrost control
The EATC system will maintain a selected temperature and automatically
control the fan speed and airflow location.
72
Climate Controls
Automatic operation
Press AUTO and select the desired
temperature. The system will either
heat or cool the vehicle to achieve
the selected temperature. The
system will automatically determine
fan speed, airflow location and
whether outside or recirculated air
is required.
AUTO
OFF
When in automatic operation and weather conditions require heat, air
will be sent to the floor ducts. However, until the engine is warmed, the
fan speed will operate at low speed and airflow will be directed to the
windshield defroster ducts. Upon engine warm up, the system will
automatically direct airflow to the floor ducts and operate the required
fan speed to achieve the selected temperature.
If unusual conditions exist (i.e., window fogging, etc.), the manual
overrides allow you to select airflow locations and the fan speed. To
return to automatic operation, press AUTO.
Temperature selection
To control the temperature, select
the desired temperature by pressing
the temperature controls.
AUTO
OFF
73
Climate Controls
Temperature conversion
Press the Fahrenheit/Celsius (F/C)
control to switch between
Fahrenheit and Celsius temperature
on the EATC display. The
temperature in Celsius will be
displayed in half-degree increments.
The English/Metric (E/M) control on
the message center (if equipped)
and the trip computer will not
change the temperature display.
Displaying outside temperature
Press EXT to display the outside air
temperature. It will be displayed
until EXT is pressed again.
If the interior temperature or fan speed are adjusted or a manual
override is selected while the outside temperature is being displayed, the
new temperature, fan speed, or override control will appear in the
display window for four seconds and the outside temperature will return
to the display window.
The outside temperature reading is most accurate when the vehicle is
moving. Higher readings may be displayed when the vehicle is not
moving. Due to locations, the outside temperature readings from the
vehicle may not agree with those obtained from radio station broadcasts.
74
Climate Controls
Fan speed (
)
When in automatic operation, fan
speed operates as necessary to
achieve the selected temperature. If
desired, the fan speed can be
adjusted manually through the use
of the fan speed control. When the
AUTO
OFF
fan speed is controlled while in
automatic operation, the AUTO
indicator will remain lit and the
system will remain in automatic operation. To return to automatic fan
operation, press AUTO.
A/C control
Used to manually enable or disable
the air conditioning in all modes
except Defrost and Floor & Defrost.
The A/C will only function if the
outside temperature is above 2°C
(35°F). In Defrost and Floor &
Defrost, the A/C will operate
automatically if the outside
temperature is above 2°C (35°F).
The A/C indicator will not be lit.
In automatic operation, the air conditioning operates as necessary to
achieve the selected temperature and the A/C indicator will be lit. If
desired, the air conditioning can be controlled manually through the use
of the A/C control. When the air conditioning is controlled while in
automatic operation, the AUTO indicator will remain lit and the system
will remain in automatic operation. To return to automatic air
conditioning operation, press AUTO.
Since the air conditioner removes moisture from the air, it is considered
normal operation if clear water drips on the ground under the air
conditioner drain.
75
Climate Controls
Recirculation control
Used to manually enable or disable
the operation of recirculated air in
all modes except Defrost. When the
air conditioning is operating,
recirculated air helps to reduce the
amount of time required to cool the
inside of the vehicle. Recirculated
air will reduce undesirable odors
from entering the vehicle.
The recirculation control cannot be selected in Defrost as interior
fogging may occur. To reduce the risk of fogging while in Floor &
Defrost, the recirculation control can be enabled for approximately 4
minutes and the recirculated air indicator will be lit. After approximately
4 minutes of recirculated air operation while in Floor & Defrost, the
EATC will automatically disable the recirculated air and the recirculated
air indicator will not be lit.
In automatic operation, recirculated air operates automatically as
necessary to achieve the selected temperature. If desired, the
recirculated air can be controlled manually through the use of the
recirculated air control. When the recirculated air is controlled while in
automatic operation, the AUTO indicator will remain lit and the system
will remain in automatic operation. To return to automatic recirculated
air, press AUTO.
Under cold or damp conditions, do not leave the climate control system
in recirculated air for extended periods of time as this may cause interior
fogging of the windows.
76
Climate Controls
Manual override controls
The manual override controls allow you to determine where airflow is
directed. To return to full automatic control, press AUTO.
The A/C compressor will only function if the outside temperature is
above approximately 2°C (35°F).
• OFF - Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate. This mode
will reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle but may
increase the possibility of interior window fogging.
•
(Panel) - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the
instrument panel registers. The system will allow some airflow through
the floor ducts.
•
(Panel & Floor) - Distributes outside or recirculated air through
the instrument panel registers and the floor ducts and side window
demisters. The air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly
warmer than that sent to the instrument panel registers.
•
(Floor) - Distributes outside or recirculated air through the floor
ducts and side window demisters.
•
(Floor & Defrost) - Distributes outside or recirculated air through
the floor ducts, windshield defroster ducts and the side window
demisters. The air distributed through the floor ducts will be slightly
warmer than that sent to the windshield defroster ducts and the side
window demisters.
•
(Defrost) - Distributes outside air through the windshield
defroster ducts and the side window demisters. However, the A/C
indicator will not be lit. This mode will clear ice and fog from the
windshield. The system will allow some airflow through the floor
ducts.
77
Climate Controls
Operating tips
• To reduce fogging in humid weather conditions, unless in Defrost and
Floor & Defrost, press the A/C control before driving as the air
conditioning removes moisture form the air.
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in warm weather
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the OFF
position.
• To reduce humidity buildup inside the vehicle in cold weather
conditions, don’t drive with the climate control system in the
recirculation mode or OFF mode.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the exterior base of the
windshield.
• To increase the efficiency of the A/C, drive with the windows slightly
open for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been
“aired out.”
• Do not place objects under the front seat or over the defroster ducts.
They may reduce visibility, fall into the ducts, or degrade the
performance of your climate control system.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel, as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROLS
The auxiliary climate control feature
provides increased capacity to
quickly heat or cool the vehicle.
Auxiliary climate controls are
located in the first row overhead
console
78
Climate Controls
and in the floor console on the back
of the front row console.
0
1
2
3
4
The auxiliary climate control system is dependent on the main climate
control system. If the main climate control system is in the Off position,
the auxiliary climate control will not operate. If the main climate control
system is on, the auxiliary air will not be cooled unless the air
conditioning is functioning on the main climate control system.
The auxiliary unit can be controlled either by the front seat using
the front auxiliary control or by the rear seat passenger(s) using
the rear auxiliary control but not both. To control the auxiliary
unit using the rear control, the front control must be in the
REAR position.
FAN SPEED CONTROL
Controls the fan speed in the rear of
the vehicle.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Controls the temperature of the
airflow in the rear of the vehicle.
79
Climate Controls
MODE SELECTOR
Press the mode selector once to
select air distribution through the
overhead vents. The Panel icon will
illuminate on the temperature
control selector. Press the mode selector again to select air distribution
through the floor vents. The Floor icon will illuminate on the
temperature control selector. Only the auxiliary control head (front or
rear) that is active will have the icons illuminated.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
Used to manually enable or disable
rear window defrost in all modes.
After approximately 10 minutes of
rear defrost operation, the climate
control system will automatically
R
disable the rear defrost operation. If
desired, the rear defrost can be
manually disabled through the use
of the rear defrost button. When
operating, the rear defrost indicator will be lit. The rear window
defroster switch also activates the standard exterior mirror defrost
feature.
80
Lights
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Rotate the headlamp control to the
first position
to turn on the
parking lamps. Rotate to the second
to turn on the
position
headlamps.
A
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on when the headlamp
,
or
control is in the
positions and the high beams are
not turned on.
Pull headlamp control towards you
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
will illuminate.
indicator light
A
Autolamp control
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to OFF.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control clockwise to OFF.
81
Lights
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the foglamps on at full intensity output. To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position and
• the headlamp control must be in the OFF or Parking lamps position.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate with your tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
82
Lights
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
Move the control to the full down
position, past detent, to prevent the interior lights from illuminating
when the doors are opened.
VERTICAL AIM ADJUSTMENT
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface approximately 7.6 meters (25 feet)
from a vertical wall or screen directly in front of it.
• (1) Eight feet
• (2) Center height of lamp to ground
• (3) Twenty-five feet
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the lens) to
the ground and mark a 2.4 meter (8
foot) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps
to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood. Cover one of the
headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
83
Lights
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a 10 mm
socket/wrench to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to adjust
down) or clockwise (to adjust up)
aligning the upper edge of the light
pattern up to the horizontal line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT
REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE
AND IS NON-ADJUSTABLE.
7. Repeat step 3–5 for the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front row map lights (if equipped)
To turn on the map lights, press the
rear edge of the light.
84
Lights
Front row dome lamp/ map light (if equipped)
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is
OFF.
The map lights are activated by pressing the controls on either side of
the lens.
Second row map lights (if equipped)
The second row map lights are
located in the headliner above the
second row seats.
• Press the controls to activate the
lights.
Rear cargo lamp
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened, and the
switch is in the middle position.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and ignition is OFF
(and switch is in the middle
position).
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.
85
Lights
BULBS
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure
lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function
Number of bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps (low-beam)
2
9006
Headlamps (high-beam)
2
9005
Front park/turn/sidemarker
2
3457 K
lamps
Foglamps
2
899
Dome/map lamps
2
579
Turn/tail/brake/sidemarker
2
3157
lamps
Approach/mirror turn
2
906
signal lamps
Backup lamp
2
3156
License lamp
2
168
High-mount brake lamp
5
W5W
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer
86
Lights
Replacing the interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Map lamps
To change the map lamp bulbs:
1. Use a small screwdriver to
remove the map lamp lens.
2. To remove the old bulb, twist 1⁄4
turn and pull it out.
3. Twist in a new bulb.
4. Align and press the map lamp
lens back on and test the lamp operation.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. At the back of the headlamp,
remove the two headlamp assembly
retainer bolts.
4. Loosen the vertical bolt on the
backside of the headlamp assembly.
Do not remove it.
5. Slide headlamp assembly forward
and off of guide ribs to expose the
back of the bulb and wiring connector.
6. Pull off the bulb covers.
87
Lights
7. Once the bulb covers are
removed, the bulbs can be removed
by turning them counterclockwise
and then pulling the bulbs straight
out.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
8. Insert the glass end of the new bulb into the headlamp assembly.
When the grooves in the plastic base are aligned, turn the new bulb
clockwise to install.
9. Reinstall the bulb covers.
10. Replace the headlamp assembly and tighten all three retainer bolts to
secure.
Replacing front parking lamp/turn/sidemarker signal bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position.
2. Open the hood.
3. Remove the two headlamp
assembly retainer bolts and lamp
assembly from the vehicle.
4. Loosen the vertical bolt on the
backside of the headlamp assembly.
Do not remove it.
88
Lights
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
the lamp assembly.
6. Carefully pull the bulb out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the
lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
8. Replace the lamp assembly and
install all three retainer bolts on the
lamp assembly.
Replacing tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup lamp bulbs
The tail/stop/turn/sidemarker/backup
lamp bulbs are located in the same
portion of the tail lamp assembly,
one just below the other. Follow the
same steps to replace either bulb:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then open
the liftgate to expose the lamp
assembly screws.
2. Remove the two screws from the
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully remove the lamp assembly away from the vehicle by pulling
the assembly straight out to expose the bulb socket. DO NOT TIP THE
LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
5. Pull bulb straight out of socket and snap in the new bulb.
6. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
7. Carefully install the tail lamp assembly on the vehicle by securing the
lamp assembly with two screws.
89
Lights
Replacing foglamp bulbs
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
1. Remove the bulb socket from the
foglamp by turning
counterclockwise.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the foglamp bulb.
3. Connect the new foglamp bulb to the electrical connector.
4. Install the bulb socket in the foglamp turning clockwise.
High-mount brakelamp
To change the high-mount
brakelamp bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws holding
the lamp assembly in place.
2. Pull the lamp assembly straight
out.
3. Remove the wire harness.
4. Depress the four tabs that hold
the light assembly on, one at a time,
and pull the black bulb carrier away
from the lamp.
5. Pull the old bulb out and replace
with the new bulb.
6. Snap the black bulb carrier into
the lamp assembly.
7. Replace the wire harness.
8. Replace the lamp assembly.
90
Lights
Replacing license plate lamp bulb
The license plate bulbs are located in the license plate housing assembly
on the liftgate. To change the license plate bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position.
2. Remove the license lamp screw
from the assembly.
3. Pull the lamp down and twist the
bulb socket counterclockwise.
Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp.
4. Pull out the old bulb and push in
the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket in the lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
6. Install the lamp assembly and secure it with the retaining screw.
Approach lamp/mirror turn signal bulb removal (if equipped)
To change the bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then fold
the mirror forward.
2. Remove the torx screw on the
bottom of the turn signal lens using
a T-10 torx driver.
3. Pull the turn signal lens down to
remove it from the mirror assembly
4. Disconnect the bulb assembly
from the lens.
5. Remove and replace the bulb.
6. Reverse the order to reassemble lamp and lens.
91
Driver Controls
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER CONTROLS
Rotate the windshield wiper control
to the desired interval, low or high
speed position.
The bars of varying length are for
intermittent wipers. When in this
position rotate the control upward
for fast intervals and downward for
slow intervals.
Push (tap) the end of the stalk
briefly for a single swipe (no wash).
Push and hold for three swipes with
wash. Push and hold for a longer
wash (up to ten seconds).
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
INT 2 — Normal speed operation of
rear wiper.
INT 1 — Intermittent operation of
rear wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and
hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer control to either
position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT 2
or OFF position.
92
Driver Controls
Speed dependent wipers
When the windshield wiper control is set on the intermittent settings,
speed-sensitive front wipers automatically adjust as the vehicle’s speed
changes.
Windshield wiper blades
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.
Checking the wiper blades
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.
Changing the wiper blades
It is recommended that wiper blades are renewed before winter.
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Fold back the wiper arm and
position the wiper blade at right
angles to the wiper arm.
2. To remove, press the retaining
clip (A) to disengage the wiper
blade, then pull the blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on the
arm and press it into place until a click is heard.
93
Driver Controls
Changing rear window wiper blade
The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position. This reduces
the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash.
To replace the wiper blade:
1. Lift and hold the wiper blade off
the glass.
2. Press the release tab to unlock
wiper blade from wiper arm.
3. Pull the wiper blade toward the
base of the wiper arm and remove it
from the arm.
4. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
TILT STEERING
Push the lever down to unlock the
steering column. While the lever is
in the down position, tilt the
steering column to the desired
position.
94
Driver Controls
While holding the steering wheel,
pull the lever up to its original
position to lock the steering column.
Never adjust the steering
column when the vehicle is
moving.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
Forward storage bin and conversation mirror (if equipped)
The storage compartment may be
used to store two pairs of sunglasses
or similar objects. Press the release
control to open the storage
compartment. The door will open
slightly and can be moved to full
open.
95
Driver Controls
The conversation mirror on the
cover allows the driver to view the
rear seating area.
This does not replace the
rear view mirror.
One-touch moon roof
(if equipped)
To open the moon roof:
• Press and release the bottom
portion of the moon roof control
to open.
• Press and hold (as desired) the
top portion of the moon roof
control to close.
• To halt motion at any point
during one-touch opening, press
the control a second time.
To vent:
• To tilt the moon roof into the vent position (when the glass panel is
closed), press and hold the top portion of the control. To close the
moon roof from the vent position, press and hold the bottom portion
of the control until the glass panel stops moving.
• The moon roof has a sliding shade that can be manually opened or
closed when the glass panel is in tilt/vent and shut positions.
• To close the shade, pull it toward the front of the vehicle.
Do not let children play with the moon roof. They may seriously
hurt themselves.
96
Driver Controls
Power quarter rear windows (if equipped)
• Without a moon roof
• With a moon roof
portion of the VENT control to open the power rear
Press the
quarter windows.
portion of the VENT control to close the power rear
Press the
quarter windows.
AUXILIARY POWER POINT
Power outlets are designed for
accessory plugs only. Do not
hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power
outlet can cause damage not
covered by your warranty.
An auxiliary power point is located
on the passenger’s side of the center
console (if equipped) or on the
instrument panel on the ash tray
door on vehicles without a center console.
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette
lighter. Use the power point.
97
Driver Controls
A second auxiliary power point is
located on the lower rear side of the
center console. The power point is
accessible from the rear seats.
0
1
2
3
4
A third auxiliary power point is located on the right rear quarter panel.
The power point is accessible from the liftgate or the third row seat.
Equipped with rear climate
control
Not equipped with rear climate
control
98
Driver Controls
POWER WINDOWS
Press and hold the rocker switches to open and close windows.
• Press the top portion of the
rocker switch to close.
• Press the bottom portion of the
rocker switch to open.
One touch down
• Press the bottom portion of the
rocker switch completely down
and release quickly. The driver’s
window will open fully. Depress
again to stop window operation.
One touch down can be deactivated
during operation by pushing down
on the top part of the driver power
window control.
99
Driver Controls
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.
Accessory delay
With accessory delay, the window switches and audio system may be
used for up to ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position or until any door is opened.
MIRRORS
Automatic dimming rear view mirrors (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from
the normal state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach
the inside rear view mirror. When the inside rear view mirror detects
bright light from in front of or behind the vehicle, the inside rear view
mirror will automatically adjust (darken) to minimize glare.
Do not block the sensor on the backside of the inside rear view mirror
since this may impair proper system performance.
Press the control to turn the mirror
OFF or AUTO.
The mirror will automatically return
to the normal state whenever the
vehicle is placed in R
(Reverse)(when the mirror is on) to ensure a bright clear view when
backing up.
OFF
100
AUTO
Driver Controls
Power side view mirrors
The ignition can be in any position to adjust the power side view mirrors.
To adjust your mirrors:
to adjust the left
1. Select
to adjust the right
mirror or
mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
disable adjust function.
Heated outside mirrors
R
Both mirrors are heated
automatically to remove ice, mist
and fog when the rear window
defrost is activated.
Do not remove ice from the
mirrors with a scraper or
attempt to readjust the mirror
glass if it is frozen in place.
These actions could cause
damage to the glass and mirrors.
Reverse tilt down mirrors (if equipped)
The side mirrors tilt down when the
vehicle is put in R (Reverse). Refer
to the Message Center in the
Driver Controls chapter to turn this
feature ON or OFF.
101
Driver Controls
Signal mirrors (if equipped)
When the turn signal is activated,
the lower portion of the mirror
housing will blink.
This provides an additional warning
to other drivers that your vehicle is
about to turn.
Fold-away mirrors
Pull the side mirrors in carefully
when driving through a narrow
space, like an automatic car wash.
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P(Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal.
• Press the bottom of the control to
adjust the pedals toward you.
• Press the top of the control to adjust the pedals away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 76 mm (3 inches) of maximum
travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on pedals
or while the vehicle is moving.
102
Driver Controls
SPEED CONTROL
To turn speed control on
• Press ON.
Vehicle speed cannot be controlled
until the vehicle is traveling at or
above 48 km/h (30 mph).
Do not shift the gearshift lever
into N (Neutral) with the speed
control on.
Do not use the speed
control in heavy traffic or
on roads that are winding,
slippery, or unpaved.
To turn speed control off
• Press OFF or
• Turn off the vehicle ignition.
Once speed control is switched off,
the previously programmed set
speed will be erased.
103
Driver Controls
To set a speed
• Press SET+. For speed control to
operate, the speed control must
RES
be ON and the vehicle speed
must be greater than 48 km/h (30
mph).
SET
+
If you drive up or down a steep hill,
COAST
your vehicle speed may vary
momentarily slower or faster than
the set speed. This is normal.
Speed control cannot reduce the
vehicle speed if it increases above the set speed going downhill. If your
vehicle speed is faster than the set speed while driving downhill, you
may want to shift to the next lower gear or apply the brakes to reduce
your vehicle speed.
If your vehicle slows down more than 16 km/h (10 mph) below your set
speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage. This is normal.
Pressing RES will re-engage it.
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery, or unpaved.
To set a higher set speed
• Press and hold SET +. Release
the control when the desired
vehicle speed is reached or
• Press and release SET + to
operate the Tap-Up function.
Each press will increase the set
speed by 1.6 km/h (1 mph) or
• Accelerate with your accelerator
pedal. When the desired vehicle
speed is reached, press and
release SET +.
RES
SET
+
COAST
You can accelerate with the accelerator pedal at any time during speed
control usage. Releasing the accelerator pedal will return your vehicle to
the previously programmed set speed.
104
Driver Controls
To set a lower set speed
• Press and hold COAST/CST −.
Release the control when the
desired speed is reached or
• Press and release COAST/CST −
to operate the Tap-Down
function. Each press will decrease
the set speed by 1.6 km/h (1
mph) or
RES
SET
+
COAST
• Depress the brake pedal. When
the desired vehicle speed is
reached, press SET +.
RES
SET
+
COAST
To disengage speed control
• Depress the brake pedal.
Disengaging the speed control will
not erase the previously
programmed set speed.
105
Driver Controls
Pressing OFF will erase the
previously programmed set speed.
To return to a previously set speed
• Press RES. For RES to operate,
the vehicle speed must be faster
than 48 km/h (30 mph).
RES
SET
+
COAST
Indicator light
This light comes on when either the
SET ACCEL or RES controls are
pressed. The vehicle speed must be
at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It
turns off when the speed control
OFF control is pressed, the brake or
clutch is applied, or the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
106
Driver Controls
Audio control features
Press
to select:
• AM, FM1, FM2,
• CD, or
• DVD (if equipped).
In AM, FM1, or FM2 mode:
• Press MEM to select preset
stations within the selected radio
band.
In CD mode:
• Press MEM to select the next
selection on the CD.
In any mode:
• Press VOL + or − to adjust
volume.
107
Driver Controls
Climate control features
Press TMP + or - to adjust
temperature.
Press
+ or - to adjust fan speed.
HOMELINK姞 UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most current transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver to a
garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink威
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
108
Driver Controls
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 Universal Transceiver buttons be erased for
security purposes, refer to Programming in this section.
Programming
Do not program the HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver with the
vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威. It is
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the red
light begins to flash after 20
seconds. Do not repeat step one to
program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink威 buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink威.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 2–8 cm (1–3 inches) away from the HomeLink威
Universal Transceiver surface (located on your visor) while keeping the
red light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
step 3 with procedures noted in the
“Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” section for Canadian
residents.
4. The red light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both buttons
when the red light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light indicates
acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency signals.)
109
Driver Controls
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button and observe the red
light. If the light is a constant red, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1.
If the red light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a
continuous red, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink威 button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
110
Driver Controls
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The red indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section.
Operating the HomeLink姞 Universal Transceiver
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact Homelink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the red
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step
2 in the “Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
111
Driver Controls
2. The red indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
ELECTRONIC COMPASS/TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
Outside air temperature
In vehicles without Electronic
Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC), the outside temperature
display is contained in the
instrument cluster and displays all
the time. In vehicles with EATC, the
temperature displays in the climate
control display.
To turn the display off or change the display from English to metric see
your dealer.
Compass
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antennas.
Magnetic or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also
affect compass accuracy.
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone adjustment.
112
Driver Controls
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone map.
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
3. Start the engine.
3 2
1
15
4
14
13
5
12
6
7 8 9 1011
4. Press the TRIP/RESET button
(near your odometer display), hold
for six seconds and release. You will
see that ZONE appears in the
instrument cluster display.
5. Press and release the button until
the desired zone number appears.
Note: The range of zone values are from 01 to 15 and “wraps” back to 01.
6. When you get to the desired ZONE number, hold the TRIP/RESET
button down to “lock in” the new value.
The cluster display will return to the “normal” mode when the
TRIP/RESET button has not been pressed for 6 seconds.
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
1. Start the vehicle.
2. To enter the compass calibration
mode, press and hold the
TRIP/RESET button for greater than
eight seconds. The display will then
show CAL in the display window.
3. Drive the vehicle slowly (less than 5 km/h [3 mph]) in circles until
CAL indicator turns off. As many as 5 complete circles may be required.
4. The compass is now calibrated.
113
Driver Controls
MESSAGE CENTER (IF EQUIPPED)
With the ignition in the ON position,
the message center, located on your
instrument cluster, displays
important vehicle information
through a constant monitor of
vehicle systems. You may select
display features on the message center for a display of status preceded
by a brief indicator chime. The system will also notify you of potential
vehicle problems with a display of system warnings followed by a long
indicator chime.
Selectable features
Reset
Press this control to select and reset
functions shown in the INFO menu
and SETUP menu.
Info menu
This control displays the following
control displays:
• Odometer/Compass
• Trip odometer/Odometer/Compass
• Distance to Empty
• Average Fuel Economy
• Trip Elapsed Drive Time
Odometer/Trip odometer
Refer to Gauges in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Compass display
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy.
114
Driver Controls
Usually, when something affects the compass readings, the compass will
correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal
conditions. If the compass still appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone/calibration
adjustment.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that
varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is four
degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the
vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting will eliminate this
error. Refer to Compass zone/calibration adjustment.
Compass zone/calibration adjustment
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
1. Determine your magnetic zone by
referring to the zone map.
3 2
1
15
2. Turn ignition to the ON position.
3. Start the engine.
4
14
4. From Info menu, select the
13
Compass/Odometer function. (Do
5
12
not select Trip, DTE, or AFE. The
top of the message center must be
blank).
6
7 8 9 1011
5. Press and hold the SETUP and
RESET controls until the message
center display changes to show the
current zone setting (xx).
6. Press the SETUP control
repeatedly until the correct zone setting for your geographic location is
displayed on the message center. The range of zone values are from 01
to 15 and “wraps” back to 01.
7. To exit the zone setting mode,
and to ‘‘lock-in’’ your change, press
and release the RESET control.
Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures
and high voltage lines. For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical
accessories (heater/air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all
vehicle doors are shut.
115
Driver Controls
8. Press the RESET control to start
the compass calibration function.
9. Slowly drive the vehicle in a
circle (less than 5 km/h [3 mph])
until the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO
CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION COMPLETED. It will take
up to five circles to complete calibration.
10. The compass is now calibrated.
Average fuel economy (AFE)
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display your average fuel
economy in liters/100 km or
miles/gallon.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled (miles
traveled by gallons used), your figure may be different than displayed for
the following reasons:
• Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• Differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• Variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0.1 liter (gallon)
1. Drive the vehicle at least 8 km (5 miles) with the speed control
system engaged to display a stabilized average.
2. Record the highway fuel economy for future reference.
It is important to press the RESET control after setting the speed
control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings.
116
Driver Controls
Trip elapsed drive time
Select this function from the INFO
menu to display a timer.
To operate the Trip Elapsed Drive
Time perform the following:
1. Press and release RESET in order
to start the timer.
2. Press and release RESET to pause the timer.
3. Press and hold RESET for 2 seconds in order to reset the timer.
Distance to empty (DTE)
Selecting this function from the
INFO menu will give you an
estimate of how far you can drive
with the fuel remaining in your tank
under normal driving conditions.
Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling your vehicle.
Otherwise, the display will not show the addition of fuel for a few
kilometers (miles).
The DTE function will display LOW FUEL LEVEL and sound a tone for 1
second when you have low fuel level indicated on the fuel gauge.
Setup menu
Press this control for the following
displays:
• System Check
• Units (English/Metric)
• Autolock
• Easy Exit Seat
• Reverse Mirrors
• Autolamp Delay
• Language
117
Driver Controls
Autolocks
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is
shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
1. To disable/enable the autolock
feature, select this function from the
SETUP control for the current
display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolocks ON or OFF.
Easy entry/exit
This feature automatically moves the drivers seat backwards for easy exit
from the vehicle.
1. To disable/enable the easy
entry/exit feature, select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the easy entry/exit ON or OFF.
Reverse mirrors
This feature automatically tilts the side view mirrors down when the
vehicle is put in R (Reverse).
1. To disable/enable the reverse
mirror feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the reverse mirrors ON or OFF.
Autolamp delay
This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the
ignition is switched off.
1. To disable/enable the autolamp
delay feature, select this function
from the SETUP control for the
current display mode.
118
Driver Controls
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the autolamp delay ON or OFF.
Reverse Sensing System (if equipped)
This feature sounds a warning tone to warn the driver of obstacles near
the rear bumper, and functions only when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
1. To disable/enable the reverse
sensing system feature, select this
function from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn
the backup aid OFF.
Language
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current
language to be displayed.
2. Pressing the RESET control
cycles the message center through
each of the language choices.
3. Press and hold the RESET
control to set the language choice.
Units (English/Metric)
1. Select this function from the
SETUP menu for the current units
to be displayed.
2. Press the RESET control to
change from English to Metric.
119
Driver Controls
System check
Selecting this function from the
SETUP menu causes the message
center to cycle through each of the
systems being monitored. For each
of the monitored systems, the
message center will indicate either an OK message or a warning message
for three seconds.
Pressing the RESET control cycles the message center through each of
the systems being monitored.
The sequence of the system check report and how it appears in the
message center is as follows:
1. FUEL LEVEL
2. WASHER FLUID LEVEL
3. ADVANCETRAC娂 (if equipped)
4. ENGINE TEMP
5. OIL PRESSURE
6. TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM (if equipped)
7. BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
8. CHARGING SYSTEM
System warnings
System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your
vehicle’s operating systems.
In the event of a multiple warning situation, the message center will
cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for 4
seconds.
The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no
more warning messages. This allows you to use the full functionality of
the message center after you acknowledge the warning by pressing the
RESET control and clearing the warning message.
Warning messages that have been reset are divided into three categories:
• They will reappear on the display every minute from the time of reset.
• They will reappear on the display ten minutes from the reset.
• They will not reappear until an ignition OFF-ON cycle has been
completed.
120
Driver Controls
This acts as a reminder that these warning conditions still exist within
the vehicle.
Warning display
Status
Check backup aid (if equipped)
Warning displays when R
(reverse) gear is selected.
PRNDL error no backup aid (if equipped)
AdvTrac ON (if equipped)
Displays for 4 seconds
AdvTrac OFF (if equipped)
Door ajar
Warning returns after 10
minutes
Liftgate ajar
Low fuel level
Check charging system
Low brake fluid level
Low oil pressure
Check engine temperature
Reduced engine power
Stop engine safely
Warning-tire very low (if equipped)
Tire pressure system fault (if equipped)
Warning returns after the
ignition key is turned
Check tire pressure (if equipped)
from OFF to ON.
Check spare tire pressure (if equipped)
Tire pressure sensor fault (if equipped)
Low washer fluid level
Check AdvTrac (if equipped)
AdvTrac OFF T/C ON (if equipped)
Check fuel cap
CHECK BACKUP AID (if equipped). Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
PRNDL ERROR NO BACKUP AID (if equipped). Displayed when the
transmission is in R (Reverse) and the Reverse Sensing System is
disabled. Refer to Reverse Sensing System in this section to enable.
ADVTRAC ON (if equipped). Displayed when the AdvanceTrac娂 is
ON.
ADVTRAC OFF (if equipped). Displayed when the AdvanceTrac娂 is
OFF.
DOOR AJAR. Displayed when a door is not completely closed.
121
Driver Controls
LIFTGATE AJAR. Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed.
CHECK ENGINE TEMPERATURE. Displayed when the engine
coolant is overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn
off the engine and let it cool. Check the coolant and coolant level. Refer
to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications chapter. If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as
soon as safely possible.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER. Displayed when the engine is
overheating. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
dealer as soon as safely possible.
STOP ENGINE SAFELY. Displayed when the engine is overheating.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your dealer as soon as
safely possible.
WARNING-TIRE VERY LOW (if equipped). Displayed when one or
more tires have very low pressure. When this warning message is
displayed, a warning chime will sound reminding you to stop the vehicle
as soon as safely possible and check your tires for proper pressure, leaks
and damage. Refer to Servicing your tires in the Maintenance and
specifications chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM FAULT (if equipped). Displayed when a
tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, have the system checked by your dealer.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). Displayed when any of the
tire pressures are high or low. Refer to Checking the tire pressure in
the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
CHECK SPARE TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). Displayed when the
spare tire pressure is high or low. Refer to Checking the tire pressure in
the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT (if equipped). Displayed when a
tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, have the system checked by your dealer.
LOW FUEL LEVEL. Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM. Displayed when the electrical system is
not maintaining proper voltage. If you are operating electrical accessories
when the engine is idling at a low speed, turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or comes on
122
Driver Controls
when the engine is operating at normal speeds, have the electrical
system checked as soon as possible.
LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the brake fluid level is low and
the brake system should be inspected immediately. Refer to Checking and
adding brake fluid in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
LOW OIL PRESSURE. Displayed when the engine oil pressure is low. If
this warning message is displayed, check the level of the engine oil.
Refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and specifications chapter for
information about adding engine oil. If the oil level is OK and this
warning persists, shut down the engine immediately and contact your
dealership for service.
LOW WASHER FLUID LEVEL. Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is
less than one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level. Refer to
Windshield washer fluid in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
CHECK ADVTRAC (if equipped). Displayed when the AdvanceTrac娂
system is not operating properly. If this message is displayed on the
message center the AdvanceTrac娂 system will be partially operable. If
this warning stays on while the engine is running, contact your dealer for
service as soon as possible. For further information, refer to
AdvanceTrac娂 stability enhancement system in the Driving chapter.
ADVTRAC OFF T/C ON (if equipped). Displayed on 4x4 vehicles only
when 4x4 Low Range is selected. In this mode, the stability enhancement
portion of the AdvanceTrac娂 is disabled, but the traction enhancement
feature remains enabled. For further information, refer to
AdvanceTrac娂 stability enhancement system in the Driving chapter.
CHECK FUEL CAP. Displayed when the fuel filler cap is not properly
installed. Check the fuel filler cap for proper installation. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and specifications chapter.
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM OFF (if equipped). Displayed when the
tire pressure monitoring system is turned off. Only your dealer can turn
the system on or off. It is recommended that the tire pressure
monitoring system is always turned ON.
DATA ERR. These messages indicate improper operation of the vehicle
network communication between electronic modules.
• Brake fluid
• Fuel computer
• Compass
• Charging system
• Outside temperature
• Door sensor
• Engine sensor
• Washer fluid
123
Driver Controls
Contact your dealer as soon as possible if these messages occur on a
regular basis.
OVERDRIVE CONTROL
Activating overdrive
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy.
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through
all available gears.
Deactivating overdrive
Press the transmission control
switch (TCS) located on the end of
the gearshift lever. The O/D OFF
indicator light will illuminate on the
instrument cluster. The transmission
will operate in all gears except
overdrive.
To return to normal overdrive mode,
press the transmission control
switch again. The O/D OFF will no
longer be illuminated.
When you shut off and re-start your
vehicle, the transmission will
automatically return to normal
(Overdrive) mode.
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission
Operation section of the Driving chapter.
124
Driver Controls
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The center console offers several useful storage features. These include:
1. Pen holder
2 3 4
1
5
2. Tissue holder
3. Cassette/CD organizer slots
4. Large utility compartment
5. PalmPilot娂/PDA holder
6
6. Cupholders
7. Coin holder slots
7
8. Small utility compartment
8
9. Two Power points
Use only soft cups in the
cupholder. Hard objects can
injure you in a collision.
9
Cell phone use
Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in
the conduct of business and personal affairs. It can enhance personal
safety and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
125
Driver Controls
POSITIVE RETENTION FLOOR MAT (IF EQUIPPED)
Position the floor mat so that the
eyelet is over the pointed end of the
retention post and rotate forward to
lock in. Make sure that the mat does
not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator or the brake pedal.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
LIFTGATE
• To open the liftgate window, push
the control button under the
center of the license plate lamp
shield.
• To open the liftgate, position your
hand on top of the liftgate handle
and pull to open the liftgate.
• Do not open the liftgate or
liftgate glass in a garage or other
enclosed area with a low ceiling.
If the liftgate glass is raised and the liftgate is also opened, both
liftgate and glass could be damaged against a low ceiling.
• Do not leave the liftgate or liftgate glass open while driving. Doing so
could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well
as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle.
Do not pull the liftgate handle from the bottom. Doing so may
cause wrist or arm injury.
Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from
being drawn into the vehicle. If you must drive with the liftgate
open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
126
Driver Controls
LUGGAGE RACK
The rear cross-bar can be adjusted to fit the item being carried. The
front cross-bar does not move.
To adjust the luggage rack, push the
adjustment lever forward (toward
the front of the vehicle), then slide
the cross-bar forward and lock the
adjusting levers by pushing them
down (toward the back of the
vehicle). Pull the cross-bar rearward
to ensure that it is locked in place.
Load luggage at the front cross-bar and adjust the rear cross-bar as
necessary.
• Do not exceed 90.7 kg (200 lb) of luggage if the weight is placed
directly on the cross-bars.
• Do not exceed 68 kg (150 lb) if the weight is resting directly on the
roof.
Use the integrated tie down loops to secure the load.
127
Locks and Security
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
Refer to SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-Theft System for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
If the door does not unlock when the control is pressed, see Interior
power door lock disable feature in the Remote entry section in this
chapter.
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Childproof door locks
When these locks are set, the rear
doors cannot be opened from the
inside. The rear doors can be
opened from the outside when the
doors are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
Move lock control up to engage the childproof lock. Move control down
to disengage childproof locks.
128
Locks and Security
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The remote entry system allows you to lock or unlock all vehicle doors
and liftgate and open the liftgate window without a key.
The remote entry lock/unlock feature operates in any ignition position.
The liftgate glass feature operates as long as the ignition is in the ON (3)
position and the vehicle’s speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph). The panic
feature operates with the key in the OFF (1) and ACC (2) position.
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are brought to the dealership, to
aid in troubleshooting.
Unlocking the doors/liftgate
Press this control to unlock the
driver’s door. The interior lamps will
illuminate with the ignition OFF.
Press the control a second time
within three seconds to unlock all
doors and liftgate.
129
Locks and Security
Locking the doors/liftgate
Press this control to lock all doors
and liftgate. The park/turn signal
lamps will flash once.
To confirm all doors are closed and
locked, press the control a second
time within three seconds; the
park/turn signal lamps will flash
once and the horn will chirp.
If any of the doors or liftgate are
ajar, the horn will make two quick
chirps, reminding you to properly close all doors.
Opening the liftgate window
Press the control to unlatch the
liftgate window.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press this control to activate the
alarm.
The personal panic alarm will cycle
the horn and parking lamps on/off.
To deactivate the alarm, press the
control again or turn the ignition to
ON.
130
Locks and Security
Memory feature (if equipped)
The remote entry system can also
control the memory feature.
Press the control once to unlock the
driver’s door. Pressing the control
will automatically move the seat,
rearview mirrors, and adjustable
pedals to the desired memory
position (the memory position
corresponds to the transmitter being
used).
Activating the memory feature
To activate this feature:
1. Position the seat, rearview mirrors, and adjustable pedals to the
positions you desire.
2. Press the SET control on the
driver’s door panel.
3. Within 5 five seconds, press one
control on the remote transmitter
and then press the 1 or 2 control on
the driver’s door panel to which you
would like to associate with Driver 1
or Driver 2 positions.
4. Repeat this procedure for another
remote transmitter if desired.
Deactivating the memory seat feature
To deactivate this feature:
1. Press the SET control on the driver’s door panel.
2. Within 5 five seconds, press any control on the remote transmitter
which you would like to deactivate and then press the SET control on
the driver’s door panel.
3. Repeat this procedure for another remote transmitter if desired.
131
Locks and Security
Replacing the battery
The remote transmitter is powered by one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent. Typical operating range will allow you to
be up to 10 meters (33 feet) away from your vehicle. A decrease in
operating range can be caused by the following factors:
• Weather conditions
• Nearby radio towers
• Structures around the vehicle
• Other vehicles parked next to the vehicle
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the transmitter near the
key ring. DO NOT TAKE THE
FRONT PART OF THE
TRANSMITTER APART.
2. Place the positive (+) side of new
battery in the same orientation.
Refer to the diagram inside the
transmitter unit.
3. Snap the two halves back
together.
Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter to
become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter should
operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost transmitters
If a remote transmitter has been lost
and you would like to remove it
from the vehicle’s memory, or you
would like to purchase additional
remote transmitters and have them
programmed to your vehicle:
• Take all your vehicle’s
transmitters to your dealer for
programming, or
• Perform the programming
procedure yourself.
132
Locks and Security
Programming remote transmitters
It is necessary to have all (maximum of four — original and/or new) of
your remote transmitters available prior to beginning this procedure.
To program the transmitters yourself:
• Unlock all the doors.
3
• Insert a key in the ignition and
turn from 1 (OFF) to 3 (ON) and
2
cycle between 1 (OFF) and 3
4
(ON) eight times in rapid
succession (within 10 seconds)
with the eighth turn ending in the
3 (ON) position. The locks will
1
cycle once to confirm that
programming mode has been
entered.
• Within 20 seconds, program a remote transmitter by pressing any
button on a transmitter. The locks will cycle once to confirm that the
remote transmitter has been programmed. (If more than 20 seconds
pass before pressing a remote transmitter button, the programming
mode will exit and the procedure will have to be repeated.)
• Repeat the previous step to program additional remote transmitters.
The locks will cycle once to confirm that each remote transmitter has
been programmed.
• When you have completed programming the remote transmitters, turn
the ignition to 1 (OFF) or wait 20 seconds. Again the doors will
lock/unlock to confirm programming has been completed.
Illuminated entry
The lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to unlock
the door(s).
The system automatically turns off after 25 seconds or when the ignition
is turned to the ON or ACC position. The dome lamp control must not
be set to the OFF position for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the OFF position.
133
Locks and Security
Smart unlocking feature
The smart unlocking feature prevents you from locking yourself out of
the vehicle by unlocking the doors if the key is in the ignition and the
driver’s door is open/ajar when the vehicle doors were locked using the
power lock/unlock control.
The smart unlocking feature operates independent of the position of the
ignition.
Autolocking feature
The autolocking feature locks all vehicle doors when the following
conditions are met:
• All doors, including the liftgate, are closed.
• The brake is pressed while the ignition is in the RUN position.
• The transmission is in either a forward or reverse gear.
• The vehicle has a speed of 8 km/h (5 mph) or greater.
This feature relocks all doors if any door is opened, the brake is pressed
after all doors are closed again and the vehicle has a speed of 8 km/h (5
mph) or greater.
Deactivating/activating the autolock feature
For vehicles equipped with a message center, the autolock feature may
be deactivated/activated by selecting the autolock function (accessed by
pressing the SETUP control). Press the RESET control to turn the
autolock function ON or OFF. Refer to Message center in the Driver
controls chapter for additional information.
For vehicles not equipped with a message center, perform the following
steps in order to deactivate/activate the autolock feature:
Before following the procedure, make sure that the ignition is in the OFF
position.
You must complete steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait 30 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition key to ON.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to ON. The horn will chirp.
134
Locks and Security
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated.
7. Turn the ignition to OFF. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
The autolock feature may also be deactivated/activated using the keyless
entry keypad. For additional information, refer to Keyless entry system
in this chapter.
Power door lock disable feature
This feature will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry.
The UNLOCK function on the power door switch will not operate with
the ignition OFF and twenty seconds after the doors are closed and
electronically locked by the remote entry transmitter, key pad, or power
door switch (if pressed while the door was open).
The UNLOCK function will operate again after you unlock the vehicle
using the remote entry transmitter or key pad, turn the ignition to ON,
or open the door from inside of the vehicle.
Deactivating/activating power door lock disable feature
This feature may be deactivated/activated by an authorized dealer.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
With the keyless entry keypad, you can:
• lock or unlock the vehicle doors without using the key.
Your vehicle has a factory set 5 digit code that operates the keyless entry
system. You can also program your own 5 digit personal entry code. The
factory-set code is located:
• on the owner’s wallet card in the glove compartment
• or at your dealer.
When pressing the controls on the keyless entry keypad, press the
middle of the controls to ensure a good activation.
This system will disable the power door lock controls. These will not
work until the vehicle is disarmed.
Programming your own personal entry code
To program your own code:
1. Enter factory set code (keypad will illuminate when pressed).
135
Locks and Security
2. Press 1/2 control within five
seconds of step 1.
1 2
3. Enter your personal 5 digit code.
Enter each digit within five seconds
of previous one.
Do not set a code that includes five
of the same number or presents
them in sequential order. Thieves
can easily figure out these types of codes.
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 0
Your personal code does not replace the permanent code that the
dealership gave you. You can use either code to unlock your vehicle. If a
second personal code is entered, the module will erase the first personal
code in favor of the new code.
If you wish to erase your personal code, use the following instructions:
1. Enter factory set code.
2. Press 1/2 control within five
seconds of step one.
3. Press 7/8 control and 9/0 control
at the same time within five seconds
of step 2.
The system will now only respond
to the factory set code.
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 0
Anti-scan feature
The keyless entry pad is disabled for
1 minute after 7 unsuccessful
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
attempts at entering a valid key
code. The keypad will flash during
this 1 minute mode. However, the 7/8 and 9/0 controls will still lock the
vehicle.
Anti-scan will be turned off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• the remote entry transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed.
• the ignition is turned to the ON position.
136
Locks and Security
Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry system
To unlock the driver door, enter
either the factory set code or the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
personal code (each digit must be
pressed within five seconds of the
prior digit). The interior lamps will
also illuminate.
To unlock all doors, enter the
factory set code or personal code
(driver door unlocks) and press the 3/4 control within five seconds.
Locking the doors with the keyless entry system
It is not necessary to enter the
factory or personal code prior to
1 2 3 4 5 6
locking all doors. To lock the doors:
• with the driver’s door closed,
press the 7/8 control and the 9/0
control at the same time.
7 8
9 0
Activating/deactivating autolock with the keyless entry system
Before following the activation or
deactivation procedures, make sure
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
that the anti-theft system (if
equipped) is not armed, ignition is
off, and all vehicle doors and liftgate window are closed.
1. Enter 5 digit entry code
2. Press and hold 7/8 control
3. Press and release 3/4 control while holding 7/8 control
4. Release 7/8 control
The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short
and one long chirp) if autolock was activated.
To re-activate autolock, repeat steps 1–4.
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to prevent the engine from being started
unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used.
137
Locks and Security
The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
THEFT INDICATOR
The theft indicator is located on top of the instrument panel.
• When the ignition is in the OFF position, the indicator will flash once
every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock娂 system is functioning as
a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the ON position, the indicator will glow for 3
seconds to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the ON position. If this
occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for service.
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 1
(OFF) position.
3
2
4
1
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 3 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
Key information
Your vehicle is supplied with two coded keys. Only a coded key will
start your vehicle. Spare coded keys can be purchased from your
dealership. Your dealership can program your key or you can “do it
yourself.” Refer to Programming spare keys.
Certain items may cause vehicle starting issues:
• Large metallic objects
• Electronic devices on the key chain that can be used to purchase
gasoline or similar items
138
Locks and Security
• A second key on the same key ring as the coded key
If any of these items are present, you need to keep these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the engine. These objects and
devices cannot damage the coded key, but can cause a momentary “no
start” condition if they are too close to the key during engine start. If a
problem occurs, turn ignition OFF and restart the engine with all other
objects on the key ring held away from the ignition key. Check to make
sure the coded key is an approved Ford coded key.
If your keys are lost or stolen you will need to do the following:
• Use your spare key to start the vehicle, or
• Have your vehicle towed to a dealership or a locksmith. The key codes
will need to be erased from your vehicle and new key codes will need
to be re-coded.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly and you may want to store an
extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to prevent
an unforeseen inconvenience.
The correct coded key must be used for your vehicle. The use of the
wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no start” condition.
If an unprogrammed key is used in the ignition it will cause a “no
start” condition.
Programming spare keys
A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle. Only
SecuriLock娂 keys can be used. To program a coded key yourself, you
will need two previously programmed coded keys (keys that already
operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed key(s) readily
accessible for timely implementation of each step in the procedure.
If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
bring your vehicle to your dealership to have the spare coded key(s)
programmed.
Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
139
Locks and Security
1. Insert the first previously
3
programmed coded key into the
ignition and turn the ignition from 1
2
(OFF) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition
in 3 (ON) for at least one second,
4
but no more than ten seconds).
2. Turn ignition to 1 (OFF) then 2
(ACC) and remove the first coded
1
key from the ignition.
3. Within ten seconds of removing
the first coded key, insert the second previously programmed coded
key into the ignition and turn the ignition from 1 (OFF) to 3 (ON)
(maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least one second but no more than
ten seconds).
4. Turn the ignition to 1 (OFF) then 2 (ACC) and remove the second
coded key from the ignition.
5. Within 10 seconds of removing the second coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key (new key/valet key) into the ignition and turn the
ignition from 1 (OFF) to 3 (ON) (maintain ignition in 3 (ON) for at least
one second, but no more than ten seconds). This step will program your
new key to a coded key.
6. To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this
procedure from step 1.
If successful, the new coded key(s) will start the vehicle’s engine and the
theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
If not successful, the new coded key(s) will not start the vehicle’s engine
and the theft indicator will flash on and off and you may repeat steps 1
through 5. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your dealership to
have the new spare key(s) programmed.
140
Seating and Safety Restraints
SEATING
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injuring people in a collision or sudden stop.
Lift handle to move seat forward or
backward.
Seat recliner
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
141
Seating and Safety Restraints
Pull the seatback handle up to
recline the seat.
Using the armrest (if equipped)
Push the release control to move
the armrest up or down.
142
Seating and Safety Restraints
Using the manual lumbar support
The lumbar support control is
located on the outboard side of the
seat.
Turn the lumbar support control
forward for more support.
Turn the lumbar support backward
for less support.
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to avoid injuring
people in a collision or sudden stop.
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press the front or rear portion to tilt
the seat.
143
Seating and Safety Restraints
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Memory seats/rearview mirrors/adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat,
outside rearview mirrors, and
adjustable pedals to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat, rearview mirrors,
and adjustable pedals to the
desired position. Press the SET control. The SET control indicator
light will briefly illuminate. While the light is illuminated, press control
1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in
Park. A memory position may be programmed at any time.
The memory positions can also be recalled when you press your remote
entry transmitter UNLOCK control.
To program the memory function to a specific remote entry transmitter,
refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and security chapter.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
The controls for the climate controlled seats are located on the center
console.
To operate the climate controlled seats the engine must be running.
144
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Push the icon on the button to
activate cooled seats. A blue light
illuminates on the button. Push
the icon again to disengage.
• Push the icon on the button to
activate heated seats. A red light
illuminates on the button. Push
the icon again to disengage.
In heat mode:
• Rotate the thumbwheel to select
the desired heat level from 1
(MIN) to 5 (MAX).
In cool mode:
• Rotate the thumbwheel to select
the desired cooling level from 1
(MIN) to 5 (MAX). When setting 1 is selected, the seat(s) will provide
vent cooling only (same temperature as cabin air).
Allow five minutes for the temperature level to stabilize.
The climate controlled seats turn off after approximately 15 minutes in
heat mode and approximately 30 minutes in cool mode to minimize
unintended drain on the vehicle’s power supply.
Climate controlled seats air filter replacement (if equipped)
The climate controlled seat system includes an air filter that has to be
replaced periodically. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
more information.
145
Seating and Safety Restraints
• There is a filter located under
both front seats.
;;;;
• It can be accessed from the
second row seat. Move the front
seat all the way forward and up
to ease access.
To remove climate controlled seat
air filter:
• Remove key from ignition.
• Push on the outside rigid edge of
the air filter at the center and
rotate downward once tab is
released.
• Remove filter.
146
;;;;
Seating and Safety Restraints
To install climate controlled seat air filter:
• First, position the filter in it’s
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in
the housing. Then push in on the
center of the outside edge of the
filter and rotate up into the
housing until it clips into position.
REAR SEATS
Second row seats
Your vehicle’s second row outboard seating positions are equipped with
head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these
head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear
collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position
as possible.
The head restraints can be raised by
lifting. To lower the head restraint,
press the release button.
If the head restraint becomes detached, replace the notched bar into the
bezel while holding the release button.
Second row folding seat system
Ensure that no objects such as books, purses or briefcases are on the
floor in front of the second row seats or on the seat cushion before
folding them down. Ensure that the head restraints are lowered.
Move the front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat
headrest clears the front seat.
147
Seating and Safety Restraints
Use caution when folding the seatback to the flat back position as
the system will move forward when you lift the release handle.
For assistance, refer to the label located on the side of the seat cushion.
Adjusting the 2nd row outboard seat for E-Z Entry
The 2nd row outboard seats allow for easier entry and exit to and from
the 3rd row seat.
To enter the 3rd row seat:
1. Locate the handle on the side of
the seat, lifting it to release the
seatback.
2. Pull up on the handle located at the back of the seat. The seat will flip
forward.
148
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. To return the seat to a seating
position, push down on the seat
until the seat is latched to the floor.
4. Lift the seatback to the upright position.
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
Folding 40% seat system to full lowered load floor position
1. Locate the handle on the side of
the seat, lifting it to release the
seatback.
2. Ensure that the seat back is
locked in the down position by
applying pressure to the seat back.
149
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Locate the latch strap at the front
of the seat and pull to release the
seat into a kneel down load floor
position. A moderate force may be
required to move the seat forward
and down.
Once the second row seats are in
the down position, the front seats
may be readjusted.
Returning to the upright position from full lowered load floor
position
The seatback cannot be returned to the upright position until the seat is
returned from the kneel down position. To return the seat to the upright
position:
From the full lowered position:
1. Lift and pull the seat rearward
until the latch is engaged.
Do not attempt to un-latch the
rear floor hooks while the seat
is in the kneel down position.
2. With the seat in the flat back
position, lift up on the lever located
on the side of the seat cushion. This
will allow the seat back to be lifted
to the upright locked position.
150
Seating and Safety Restraints
The rear latch hooks must
be properly engaged with
the floor striker. Position the rear
legs of the seat over the floor
strikers and engage.
Folding the 20% seat system (if equipped)
1. Locate the release strap located
between the front cushion and the
seat back, and pull the strap to
release the folding seat latch.
2. With the latch released the
seatback can be lowered into the
load floor position.
151
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. To return the seat to the upright
position, lift the seatback until the
latch is fully engaged.
Adjusting the second row 20% seat (if equipped)
Lift the handle to move the seat
forward or backward.
Note: This seat can be moved forward to keep a child in a child
restraint close to the front seat occupants. The seat should be
moved to the full rearward position when it is occupied by older
children or adults.
Reclining the second row 40% seatback
Locate the release handle located on
the outboard side of the seat
cushion and lift gently to allow the
seatback to be adjusted to the
desired location.
152
Seating and Safety Restraints
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Third row seats
Ensure that no objects such as books, purses or briefcases are on the
floor in front of the third row seats or on the seat cushion before
lowering them. Ensure that the head restraints are lowered.
Folding down the third row seat to the load floor
To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety belts, ensure
that the safety belts are not buckled when moving the seat to the
load floor position.
Pull up on the handle located
behind the seatback while pushing
the seatback forward and down into
the seat cushion.
To return the seatback to its original
position lift the seatback until it
latches into place.
Third row power folding seat (if equipped)
The control buttons are in two locations: the left-hand quarter trim panel
(accessible from the second row) and the right-hand rear quarter trim
panel (accessible from the liftgate area).
153
Seating and Safety Restraints
Push the bottom portion of the
control button to lower the desired
seatback.
Push the top of the control button
to return the seatback to its original
position.
The power folding seats are designed to stall within 1–10 seconds
of encountering an obstruction when opening or closing. Should
this occur, remove the obstruction and wait approximately 1–4
minutes for the seat motor to reset.
The power fold down seats will operate for 30 minutes after the
ignition switch is in Off. The transmission must be in P (park),
and the liftgate, liftgate glass, or left rear door must be open.
Similar to the Battery Saver feature, the power 3rd row seat will
be disabled 30 minutes after turning the vehicle off. If the power
3rd row seat is disabled after 30 minutes, the seat can be enabled
by opening any door, pressing the unlock key on the key fob,
pressing any keyless keypad button, or turning the ignition key.
Third row adjustable head restraints
Your vehicle’s third row outboard seating positions are equipped with
head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these
head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of a rear
collision. To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint
so that it is located directly behind your head or as close to that position
as possible.
154
Seating and Safety Restraints
The head restraints can be moved
up and down.
Push control to lower head restraint.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Personal Safety System
The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of air bag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints.
155
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Front safety belts with pretensioners, energy management retractors,
and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front crash severity sensor.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.
• The electrical wiring for the air bags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the personal safety system work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a crash, the
RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either one or both
stages of the dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
The fact that the pretensioners or air bags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System determined the
accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front air bags are designed
to activate only in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollovers,
side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient
longitudinal deceleration.
Driver and passenger dual-stage air bag supplemental restraints
The dual-stage air bags offer the capability to tailor the level of air bag
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for
the most severe impacts. Refer to Air bag Supplemental Restraints
section in this chapter.
Front crash severity sensor
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This
allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the
dual-stage air bags and safety belt pretensioners.
156
Seating and Safety Restraints
Driver’s seat position sensor
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage air bag based on seat
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting
close to the driver air bag by providing a lower air bag output level.
Front safety belt usage sensors
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information
allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the air bag deployment and
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.
Refer to Safety Belt section in this chapter.
Front safety belt pretensioners
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to tighten the safety belts
firmly against the occupant’s body during a collision. This maximizes the
effectiveness of the safety belts and helps properly position the occupant
relative to the air bag to improve protection. The safety belt
pretensioners can be either activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the air bags.
Front safety belt energy management retractors
The front safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be
pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in
response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load
on the occupant. Refer to Safety Belt section in this chapter.
Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational
The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer
to the Warning Light section in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required.
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits
and the circuits for the air bag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, and the driver
seat position sensor. In addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints
warning light in the instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is
indicated by one or more of the following:
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is
turned on.
157
Seating and Safety Restraints
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal
Safety System serviced at your dealership or by a qualified technician
immediately. Unless serviced, the system may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit where they
can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
158
Seating and Safety Restraints
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle.
• Front seats
• Rear seats
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
159
Seating and Safety Restraints
The front outboard, rear outboard, and second and third row center
safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts.
The front center safety restraint (if equipped) is a manually-adjustable
lap belt. All of the passenger lap and shoulder belts have two types of
locking modes described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5
mph) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is pre-locked. The belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to use the automatic locking mode
• Anytime a child safety seat (except a booster) is installed in the
vehicle. Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for
children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
160
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire belt
is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the combination lap and shoulder belt
system at all passenger seating positions must be checked by a
qualified technician to verify that the “automatic locking retractor”
feature for child seats is still functioning properly, in addition to other
checks for proper seat belt system function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly. In addition, all
seat belts should be checked for proper function.
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase
the risk of injury in collisions.
Safety belt pretensioner
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and
right front passenger seating positions.
161
Seating and Safety Restraints
The safety belt pretensioner removes some slack from the safety belt
system at the start of a crash. The safety belt pretensioner uses the
same crash sensor system as the front airbags and Safety Canopy娂
system. When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, the lap and shoulder
belt are tightened.
When the Safety Canopy娂 system and/or the front airbags are activated,
the safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger
seating positions will be activated when the respective seatbelt is
properly buckled.
The driver and the right front passenger seat belt system
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment
of front air bags or Safety Canopy娂 and safety belt pretensioners.
Refer to the Safety belt maintenance section in this chapter.
Front and second row safety belt height adjustment
Your vehicle has safety belt height
adjustments for the driver, right
front passenger and second row
outboard passengers. Adjust the
height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
To lower the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster down. To raise the height
of the shoulder belt, push the
button and slide the height adjuster
up. Pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place.
Position the safety belt
height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of
your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt and increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
162
Seating and Safety Restraints
First row center lap belt (if equipped)
Adjusting the lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The seat belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
163
Seating and Safety Restraints
Conditions of operation
If...
The driver safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position...
Then...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8
seconds.
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver safety belt is buckled
while the indicator light is
illuminated and the warning chime
is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
The driver safety belt is buckled
before the ignition switch is turned indicator chime remain off.
to the ON position...
BeltMinder姟
The BeltMinder娂 feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
If...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled approximately 5 seconds
after the safety belt warning light
has turned off...
Then...
The BeltMinder娂 feature is
activated - the safety belt warning
light illuminates and the warning
chime sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder娂 feature will not
while the safety belt indicator light activate.
is illuminated and the safety belt
warning chime is sounding...
The driver’s safety belt is buckled The BeltMinder娂 feature will not
before the ignition switch is turned activate.
to the ON position...
The purpose of the BeltMinder娂 is to remind occasional wearers to wear
safety belts all of the time.
164
Seating and Safety Restraints
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given...
“Crashes are rare
events”
Consider...
36 700 crashes occur every day. The more we
drive, the more we are exposed to “rare” events,
even for good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during our
lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles of home.
“Belts are
We design our safety belts to enhance comfort. If
uncomfortable”
you are uncomfortable - try different positions for
the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as possible; this can
improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident. BeltMinder娂
reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up.
“Seat belts don’t
Safety belts, when used properly, reduce risk of
work”
death to front seat occupants by 45% in cars,
and by 60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light”
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single-vehicle
crashes, many when no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my Possibly, but a serious crash can do much more
clothes”
than wrinkle your clothes, particularly if you are
unbelted.
“The people I’m
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4 times more
with don’t wear
often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people.
belts”
Children and younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when used with
safety belts. Frontal airbags are not designed to
inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be
Not a good idea. People who are ejected are 40
thrown clear”
times more likely to DIE. Safety belts help
prevent ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR CRASH”.
165
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder娂 chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk
of injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder娂 feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, BeltMinder娂 will be disabled for that ignition cycle
only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder姟 feature
Read steps 1 - 9 thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
The BeltMinder娂 feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• The parking brake is set
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position
• All vehicle doors are closed
• The driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• The parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position (If vehicle is equipped
with Autolamps, this will not affect the procedure.)
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the
BeltMinder娂 feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1–2
minutes)
• Steps 3–5 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated.
166
Seating and Safety Restraints
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled. This can be done before or during BeltMinder娂
warning activation.
4. Turn on the parklamps/headlamps, turn off the parklamps/headlamps.
5. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled.
• After step 5 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three
seconds.
6. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.
• This will disable BeltMinder娂 if it is currently enabled, or enable
BeltMinder if it is currently disabled.
7. Confirmation of disabling BeltMinder娂 is provided by flashing the
safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds.
8. Confirmation of enabling BeltMinder娂 is provided by flashing the
safety belt warning light four times per second for three seconds,
followed by three seconds with the safety belt warning light off, then
followed by flashing the safety belt warning light four times per second
for three seconds again.
9. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 20 cm (8
inch) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
167
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters, shoulder belt guide on seatback (if equipped), child
safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should
be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies used in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced.
However, if the collision was minor and a qualified technician finds that
the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do
not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or
improper operation is noted.
Refer to Cleaning and maintaining the safety belts in the Cleaning
chapter.
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module
which records information about the air bag and sensor systems. In the
event of a collision this module may save information related to the
collision including information about the air bag system and impact
severity. This information will assist Ford Motor Company in servicing
the vehicle and in helping to better understand real world collisions and
further improve the safety of future vehicles.
168
Seating and Safety Restraints
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries. Air
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is
a risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag (SRS) is
provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10 inches)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the air bag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
169
Seating and Safety Restraints
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag
sensors increasing the risk of injury.
Children and air bags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Air bags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active air bag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
170
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?
The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the sensors to close an
electrical circuit that initiates air
bag inflation.
The fact that the air bags did not
inflate in a collision does not mean
that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces
were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation. The driver and passenger airbags are designed to inflate
in frontal and near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or
rear-impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal
deceleration.
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (e.g., baking
soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the
air bag. Small amounts of sodium
hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying air bag may also cause abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because air bags must inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries, particularly to occupants who
are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time
of air bag deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be
properly restrained as far away from the air bag module as possible while
maintaining vehicle control.
171
Seating and Safety Restraints
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and
air bags),
• one or more impact and safing sensors and diagnostic monitor (RCM),
• a readiness light and tone
• the electrical wiring which connects the components.
The RCM (restraints control module) monitors its own internal circuits
and the supplemental air bag electrical system warning (including the
impact sensors, the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the
air bag back up power and the air bag ignitors).
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section
in the Instrument cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
172
Seating and Safety Restraints
Safety Canopy姟 system (if equipped)
Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or
near the headliner at the siderail
that may come into contact with a
deploying Safety Canopy娂. Failure
to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury
in the event of a collision.
Do not lean your head on the door. The Safety Canopy娂 could
injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the Safety Canopy娂
system, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the headliner on a
vehicle containing a Safety Canopy娂. See your Ford or Lincoln
Mercury dealer.
All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an air bag SRS and Safety
Canopy娂 system is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy娂.
173
Seating and Safety Restraints
How does the Safety Canopy姟 system work?
The design and development of the
Safety Canopy娂 system included
recommended testing procedures
that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as
the Side Air Bag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of
side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy娂).
The Safety Canopy娂 system
consists of the following:
• An inflatable nylon curtain with a
gas generator concealed behind
the headliner and above the doors
(one on each side of vehicle).
• A headliner designed to flex open
above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy娂 deployment.
• The same warning light, electronic control and diagnostic unit as used
for the front airbags.
• Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors (one on each side).
• Two crash sensors located at the c-pillar behind the rear doors (one
on each side).
• Rollover sensor in the restraints control module (RCM).
The Safety Canopy娂 system, in combination with seat belts, can help
reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact
collision or rollover event.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the second or third row seats. The Safety Canopy娂 will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The Safety Canopy娂 system is designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to
close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy娂 inflation or when
a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
174
Seating and Safety Restraints
The Safety Canopy娂 is mounted to roof side-rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above the first and second row seats. In certain lateral
collisions or rollover events, the Safety Canopy娂 system will be
activated, regardless of which seats are occupied. In certain rollover
events, the Safety Canopy娂 on both sides of the vehicle will be inflated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy娂 is designed
to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The fact that the Safety Canopy娂 did not activate in a collision does not
mean that something is wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation. The Safety
Canopy娂 is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or
rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal collisions,
unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover
likelihood.
Several Safety Canopy娂
system components get hot
after inflation. Do not touch them
after inflation.
If the Safety Canopy娂
system has deployed, the
Safety Canopy娂 will not
function again unless replaced.
The Safety Canopy娂 system
(including the A, B and C
pillar trim) must be inspected
and serviced by a qualified
technician in accordance with
the vehicle service manual. If
the Safety Canopy娂 is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will
increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
175
Seating and Safety Restraints
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Air bag readiness
section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the air
bag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light (same light as for front air bag system) will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is
turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a collision
or rollover event.
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles (including
pretensioners)
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 18 kg [40 lbs] or less) ride in your vehicle,
you must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Check
your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements
regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When possible, always
place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
176
Seating and Safety Restraints
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
177
Seating and Safety Restraints
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lbs (about 8 to 12 years old).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
178
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs.
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
179
Seating and Safety Restraints
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Air bag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure
the tongue is securely fastened in
the buckle.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode section in this chapter.
180
Seating and Safety Restraints
• The second row center seat can be moved forward to keep a child in a
child restraint close to the front seat occupants. The seat should be
moved to the full rearward position when it is occupied by older
children or adults.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether strap
and LATCH attachments. Install the child safety seat in a seating position
which is capable of providing tether and LATCH anchors. For more
information, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
and Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children) attachments for child seat anchors in this chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
181
Seating and Safety Restraints
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
182
Seating and Safety Restraints
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
183
Seating and Safety Restraints
Installing child safety seats in the center front seating position
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the rear
seats and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
It is safer to install child safety seats in seating positions that
have child seat anchors. The front seat has no tether anchor nor
does it have LATCH anchors.
1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt, hold the tongue so that its
bottom is perpendicular to the direction of webbing while sliding the
tongue up the webbing.
2. Place the child safety seat in the center seating position.
3. Route the tongue and webbing through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle for the center seating
position until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened to the buckle by pulling on tongue.
5. Push down on the child seat with your knee while pulling on the loose
end of the lap belt webbing to tighten the belt.
6. Before placing the child into the child seat, forcibly move the child
seat from side to side and forward to make sure that the seat is held
securely. If the child seat moves excessively, repeat steps 5 through 6, or
properly install the child seat in a different position.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
In the third row center seating position, the tether anchor is a loop at
the bottom of the seatback.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
184
Seating and Safety Restraints
• Second row bench seat
• Second row bucket seats
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
Second row seating positions
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Locate the tether anchor at the bottom back of the seat.
• outboard seating positions
185
Seating and Safety Restraints
• center seating position (if
equipped)
3. Route the child safety seat tether strap under the head restraint
(outboard seats) and over the back of the seat.
4. Grasp the tether strap and
position it to the seat frame.
5. Rotate the tether strap, and clip
the tether strap to the anchor on
the seat frame.
186
Seating and Safety Restraints
6. Rotate the tether strap clip.
7. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Third row seating position
1. Position the child safety seat on the center of the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
3. Locate the anchor webbing loop for the seating position.
• You may need to pull back the
top of the hinged panel along the
bottom of the seat back to access
the tether anchor.
187
Seating and Safety Restraints
4. Clip the tether strap through the
anchor loop as shown.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Refer to the Installing child
safety seats in combination lap
and shoulder belt seating
positions section of this chapter for
further instructions to secure the
child safety seat.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
Attaching safety seats with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children) attachments for child seat anchors
Some child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two anchors at certain seating positions in your vehicle.
This type of child seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats, the tether strap must also be
attached to the proper tether anchor. See Attaching safety seats with
tether straps in this chapter.
188
Seating and Safety Restraints
Your vehicle has LATCH anchors for child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat symbol:
Never attach two LATCH child safety seats to the same anchor.
In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two
child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
The lower anchors for child seat
installation are located at the rear
section of the second row seat
between the cushion and seat back.
The LATCH anchors are below the
locator symbols on the seat back.
189
Seating and Safety Restraints
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install a
child seat with LATCH attachments.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the
anchors shown.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, do not tighten
the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion
when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug without
lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just touching the
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor. Try to move the child
seat from side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a crash greatly increases.
190
Driving
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. OFF/LOCK, locks the steering
3
wheel, automatic transmission
gearshift lever and allows key
2
removal.
4
2. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
1
3. ON, all electrical circuits
operational. Warning lights
illuminated. Key position when driving.
4. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, avoid pressing the accelerator
before or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have
difficulty starting the engine. For more information on starting the
vehicle, refer to Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
191
Driving
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
A computer system controls the engine’s idle revolutions per minute
(RPM). When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs higher than normal in
order to warm the engine. If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have the vehicle checked. Do not allow the vehicle to idle
for more than 10 minutes at the higher engine RPM.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts. For
more information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the
Seating and safety restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and vehicle accessories are off.
3. Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
4. Make sure the parking brake is
set.
192
Driving
5. Turn the key to 3 (ON) without
turning the key to 4 (START).
3
2
4
1
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the
light may not illuminate.
Starting the engine
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.
1. Turn the key to 4 (START)
3
without pressing the accelerator
pedal and release as soon as the
2
engine starts. The key will return to
3 (ON).
4
2. If the temperature is above –12°
C (10° F) and the engine does not
start within five seconds on the first
1
try, turn the key to OFF, wait 10
seconds and try again.
193
Driving
3. If the temperature is below -12° C (10° F) and the engine does not
start in 15 seconds on the first try, turn the key OFF and wait 10
seconds and try again. If the engine does not start in two attempts, press
the accelerator pedal all the way to floor and hold. Turn the key to
START position.
4. When the engine starts, release the key, then release the accelerator
pedal gradually as the engine speeds up.
5. After idling for a few seconds, apply the brake, shift into gear and
drive.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
Use of an engine block heater is strongly recommended if you live in a
region where temperatures reach -23° C (-10° F) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least three hours before starting the vehicle.
The heater can be plugged in the night before starting the vehicle.
To prevent electrical shock, do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least 2.5 cm (one inch) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
194
Driving
BRAKES
Your service brakes are self-adjusting. Refer to the scheduled
maintenance guide for scheduled maintenance.
Occasional brake noise is normal and often does not indicate a
performance concern with the vehicle’s brake system. In normal
operation, automotive brake systems may emit occasional or intermittent
squeal or groan noises when the brakes are applied. Such noises are
usually heard during the first few brake applications in the morning;
however, they may be heard at any time while braking and can be
aggravated by environmental conditions such as cold, heat, moisture,
road dust, salt or mud. If a “metal-to-metal,” “continuous grinding” or
“continuous squeal” sound is present while braking, the brake linings
may be worn-out and should be inspected by a qualified service
technician.
If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear.
Do not apply your brakes continuously, as they may overheat
and become less effective.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
On ABS-equipped vehicles, a noise from the hydraulic pump motor and
pulsation in the pedal may be observed during ABS braking events. Pedal
pulsation coupled with noise while braking under panic conditions or on
loose gravel, bumps, wet or snowy roads is normal and indicates proper
functioning of the vehicle’s anti-lock brake system. The ABS performs a
self-check after you start the engine and begin to drive away. A brief
mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If a
malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.
The ABS operates by detecting the onset of wheel lockup during brake
applications and compensates for this tendency. The wheels are
prevented from locking even when the brakes are firmly applied.
Using ABS
• In an emergency or when maximum efficiency from the four-wheel
ABS is required, apply continuous force on the brake. The four wheel
ABS will be activated immediately, thus allowing you to retain steering
control of your vehicle and, providing there is sufficient space, will
enable you to avoid obstacles and bring the vehicle to a controlled
stop.
195
Driving
• The anti-lock system does not always reduce stopping distance.
Always leave enough room between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you to stop.
• We recommend that you familiarize yourself with this braking
technique. However, avoid taking any unnecessary risks.
ABS warning lamp
ABS
The ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the light does not
illuminate momentarily at start up, remains on or continues to flash, the
ABS needs to be serviced.
With the ABS light on, the anti-lock
brake system is disabled and normal
braking is still effective unless the
brake warning light also remains
illuminated with parking brake released. (If your brake warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle serviced immediately.)
Brake Assist
The Brake Assist system provides full braking force during panic braking
situations. It detects a rapid application of the brake pedal and
maximizes the amount of brake booster assist, helping the driver to
achieve maximum braking pressure. Once a panic brake application is
detected, the system will remain activated as long as the brake pedal is
depressed. The system is deactivated by releasing the brake pedal.
When the system activates, the brake pedal will travel with very little
effort; this is normal.
Parking brake
Apply the parking brake whenever
the vehicle is parked. To set the
parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down until the pedal
stops.
196
Driving
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated (when the
ignition is turned ON) until the
parking brake is released.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.
Pull the release lever to release the
brake. Driving with the parking
brake on will cause the brakes to
wear out quickly and reduce fuel
economy.
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.
To prevent damage to the power steering pump:
• Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
197
Driving
If the steering wanders or pulls, the condition could be caused by any of
the following:
• Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
• Uneven vehicle loading
• High crown in center of road
• High crosswinds
• Wheels out of alignment
• Loose or worn suspension components
Speed sensitive steering
Your vehicle is equipped with engine speed sensitive steering. At higher
engine speeds associated with high vehicle speed, the steering assist will
decrease to improve steering feel.
If the amount of effort required to steer your vehicle changes while
maintaining a constant engine speed, have the power steering system
checked by your dealer or a qualified service technician.
LIMITED-SLIP AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
limited slip axle functions like a standard rear axle.
Extended use of other than the manufacturer’s specified size tires on a
limited slip rear axle could result in a permanent reduction in
effectiveness. This loss of effectiveness does not affect normal driving
and should not be noticeable to the driver.
To reduce the risk of injury, never run the engine with one wheel
off the ground, such as when changing a tire.
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
198
Driving
Your vehicle has special design and equipment features to make it
capable of performing in a wide variety of circumstances. These special
design features, such as larger tires and increased ground clearance, give
the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling people and cargo may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Use extra caution while becoming familiar with your vehicle. Know the
capabilities and limitations of both you as a driver and your vehicle.
ADVANCETRAC姟 STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
The AdvanceTrac娂 system provides a stability enhancement feature as
well as a traction enhancement feature. It helps your vehicle maintain
traction, when driving on slippery and/or hilly road surfaces, by detecting
and controlling wheel spin. Excessive wheel spin is controlled by
momentarily reducing engine power and rapidly applying the anti-lock
brakes. The system is a driver aid which makes your vehicle easier to
handle primarily on snow and ice-covered roads.
If your vehicle should become stuck in deep snow or mud, try switching
the AdvanceTrac娂 system off by pressing the AdvanceTrac娂 button.
This will allow your tires to “dig” for traction.
199
Driving
If the AdvanceTrac娂 system is activated and deactivated excessively in a
short period of time, the brake portion of the system will shut down to
allow the brakes to cool down. A limited AdvanceTrac娂 function using
only engine power reduction will still help control the wheels from
over-spinning. When the brakes have cooled down, the system will again
function normally. Anti-lock braking is not affected by this condition and
will function normally during the cool-down period.
AdvanceTrac娂 enhances your vehicle’s stability during maneuvers that
require all available tire traction, like in wet/snowy/icy road conditions
and/or when performing emergency maneuvers. In an emergency
lane-change, the driver will experience better overall vehicle traction,
and have better control of the vehicle.
The AdvanceTrac娂 system helps the driver maintain steering control if
the vehicle begins to slide excessively left or right or spin out.
AdvanceTrac娂 will attempt to correct the sliding motion by applying
brake force at individual tires and, if necessary, by reducing engine
power.
Driving conditions which may activate AdvanceTrac娂 include:
• Taking a turn too fast
• Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident, pedestrian or obstacle
• Hitting a patch of ice
• Changing lanes on a snow-rutted road
• Entering a snow-free road from a snow-covered side street, or vice
versa
• Entering a paved road from a gravel road, or vice versa
• Hitting a curb while turning
• Driving on slick surfaces
• Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer (refer to Trailer
Towing in this chapter)
The AdvanceTrac娂 system automatically turns on when the engine is
started. However, the system does not function when the vehicle is
traveling in R (Reverse) or, if equipped with four-wheel drive, in 4L (4X4
LOW). In R (Reverse) or in 4L (4X4 LOW), ABS and the traction
enhancement feature will continue to function.
200
Driving
The AdvanceTrac娂 button allows
the driver to control the availability
of the AdvanceTrac娂 system.
AdvanceTrac娂 system status is
indicated by a warning indicator
light with a “sliding car” icon in the instrument cluster that will flash
when the system is active and an indicator light in the control button
that will illuminate when the system is turned off. In vehicles with a
message center, the message “ADVANCETRAC OFF” will be displayed.
If a failure is detected in the AdvanceTrac娂 system, the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster will stay on. If the warning
indicator light in the instrument cluster remains on while the engine is
running, have the system serviced immediately.
Pressing the control once will disable the AdvanceTrac娂 stability
enhancement and the engine power reduction portion of the traction
enhancement feature; the brake portion of the traction enhancement
feature will still function normally. Pressing and holding the control for
more than five seconds will disable the AdvanceTrac娂 stability
enhancement and traction enhancement feature. If the vehicle is stuck
in snow or mud or when driving in deep sand, switching off the
AdvanceTrac娂 system may be beneficial so the wheels are allowed to
spin. If your vehicle seems to lose engine power while driving in deep
sand or very deep snow, switching off the AdvanceTrac娂 stability
enhancement feature will restore full engine power and will enhance
momentum through the obstacle.
Some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake pedal when the
AdvanceTrac娂 performs a system self-check. During AdvanceTrac娂
operation you may experience the following:
• A rumble or grinding noise
• A slight deceleration of the vehicle
• The AdvanceTrac娂 indicator light will flash
• If your foot is on the brake pedal, you will feel a vibration in the
pedal.
• If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake, the
brake pedal will move to apply higher brake forces. You may also hear
a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe
condition.
All these conditions are normal during AdvanceTrac娂 operation.
201
Driving
Do not alter or modify your vehicle’s suspension or steering; the
resulting changes to the vehicle’s handling can adversely affect
the AdvanceTrac娂 system. Also, do not install a stereo
loudspeaker near the front center console or under either front
seat. The speaker vibrations can adversely affect the
AdvanceTrac娂 sensors located in this area.
Aggressive driving in any road conditions can cause you to lose
control of your vehicle increasing the risk of severe personal
injury or property damage. The occurrence of an AdvanceTrac娂 event
is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their
ability to grip the road and that you may lose control of the vehicle. If
you experience a severe road event, SLOW DOWN.
If you find yourself regularly experiencing AdvanceTrac娂 events,
you are driving too fast for conditions, you should reduce your
speed, and drive less aggressively. It is always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driving habits under severe
conditions. The occurrence of an AdvanceTrac娂 event is an indication
that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this may cause you to lose control of the vehicle increasing the
risk of severe personal injury or property damage.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a park/brake-shift interlock feature that
prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the
ignition is in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed, or when the ignition is
in the OFF position:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition to OFF, then remove the
key.
2. Push the tilt steering lever down and tilt the steering column all the
way up.
202
Driving
3. Locate the round access plug on
the underside of the steering
column cover.
4. Remove the access plug using a flat-head screwdriver, then insert your
finger and pull the override button toward you. With the button pulled
toward you, apply the brake pedal and shift the transmission into N
(Neutral).
5. Reinstall the access plug cover, start the vehicle and release the
parking brake.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission
Your vehicle’s automatic transmission is equipped with a special shift
strategy that insures maximum heater performance during cold weather
operation.
203
Driving
When ambient temperature is –5° C (23° F) or below and the engine
coolant temperature is below 38° C (100° F), light throttle upshifts may
be slightly delayed. Once the engine coolant temperature reaches 71° C
(160° F) the normal shift strategy will resume. This is normal operation
and will not affect the function or the durability of the transmission.
If the normal shift strategy does not resume once the engine
coolant temperature reaches the normal operating temperature,
or if the downshifts and other throttle conditions do not function
normally, see your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon
as possible.
Understanding gearshift positions
To put your vehicle in gear, start the engine, depress the brake pedal,
then move gearshift lever out of P (Park).
Hold the brake pedal down while you move the gearshift lever
from P (Park) to another position. If you do not hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly and injure someone.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). Make
sure the gearshift lever is securely
latched in P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents
the rear wheels from turning.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R
(Reverse), the vehicle will move
backward. Always come to a
complete stop before shifting into and out of R (Reverse).
204
Driving
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N
(Neutral), the vehicle can be started
and is free to roll. Hold the brake
pedal down while in this gear.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
(Overdrive) can be deactivated
by pressing the transmission control
switch (TCS) on the end of the
gearshift lever.
The transmission control indicator
light (TCIL) will illuminate in the
instrument cluster.
O/D
OFF
Drive – Not shown on the display. Activate by pressing the transmission
control switch (TCS) on the end of the gearshift lever with the gearshift
position. The TCIL will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
in the
(Drive) provides
Transmission operates in gears one through three.
(Overdrive) and is useful when:
more engine braking than
• driving with a heavy load.
• towing a trailer up or down steep hills.
• additional engine downhill braking is desired. If towing a trailer, refer
to Driving while you tow in the Trailer towing section.
(Overdrive) mode, press the transmission control switch
To return to
(TCS). The TCIL will no longer be illuminated.
Each time the vehicle is started, the transmission will automatically
return to normal overdrive mode.
Every time the vehicle is shut off and restarted, you must press the
transmission control switch to cancel overdrive operation if driving in
overdrive is not desired.
205
Driving
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on
slippery roads or to provide
additional engine braking on
downgrades.
1 (First)
Use 1 (Low) to provide maximum
engine braking on steep
downgrades. Upshifts can be made
by shifting to 2 (Second) or to
(Overdrive). Selecting 1 (Low) at
higher speeds causes the transmission to shift to a lower gear, and will
shift to 1 (Low) after vehicle decelerates to the proper speed.
Forced Downshifts
To gain acceleration in
(Overdrive) or Drive (O/D OFF) when
passing another vehicle, push the accelerator to the floor. The
transmission will downshift to the appropriate gear: third, second or first
gear.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting from forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac娂, it may be beneficial to
turn the system off so the wheels are allowed to spin.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear
bumper when R (Reverse) gear is selected.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
206
Driving
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in
reverse and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting objects to avoid damaging the vehicle.
The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly those close to
the ground.
The system will assist the driver in detecting certain objects while the
vehicle slowly moves in reverse at speeds less than 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is not effective at speeds greater than 10 km/h (6 mph) and
may not detect certain angular or moving objects.
The system detects obstacles up to
a maximum range of six meters (20
ft.) behind the rear bumper with a
decreased coverage area at the
outer corners of the bumper, (refer
to the figures for approximate zone
coverage areas). As you move closer
to the obstacle, the rate of the tone
increases. When the distance to the
obstacle is less than 45.0 cm (18
in.), the tone will sound
continuously. If the system detects
an object that is approaching the
vehicle at such as rate that rapid
braking is required, a very high rate
tone will sound. If this tone is heard
while reversing, the driver is advised
to slow down immediately until the
tone either changes to a slower rate
or stops.
The system is automatically enabled when the gear selector is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON. The RSS control in the message
center allows the driver to disable the system only when the ignition is
ON, and the gear selector is in R (Reverse).
207
Driving
Always keep the sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from dirt, snow and ice (do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects). These elements may cause the system to operate
inaccurately.
If the vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CONTROL TRAC FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4X4) OPERATION
(IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
If equipped with the Control Trac 4x4 System, and 4L (4x4 LOW)
is selected while the vehicle is moving, the system will not
engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern.
Before 4L (4x4 LOW) can be engaged, the vehicle must be
brought to a complete stop, the brake pedal depressed and the
transmission placed in N (Neutral).
The vehicle should not be operated in 4H (4x4 HIGH) or 4L (4x4 LOW)
on dry pavement. Doing so could result in difficult disengagement of the
transfer case, increased tire wear, decreased fuel economy and may
damage driveline components.
Your 4x4 features the heavy-duty Control Trac system which includes a
computer-operated transfer case. This unique system is interactive with
the road, continually monitoring and adjusting torque delivery to the
front and rear wheels to optimize vehicle control.
System indicator lights
The Control Trac system indicator lights illuminate only under the
following conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2H or
A4WD, contact your Ford dealer as soon as possible.
• 4X4 HIGH - momentarily
4x4
illuminates when the vehicle is
HIGH
started. Illuminates when 4H is
selected.
208
Driving
• 4X4 LOW – momentarily
illuminates when the vehicle is
started. Illuminates when 4L is
selected.
4x4
LOW
Positions of the Control Trac system
The Control Trac system functions
in four modes:
• 2H (2WD HIGH) delivers power
to the rear wheels only. This is
appropriate for normal on-road
driving on dry pavement.
• A4WD (4X4 AUTO) provides
electronic control four-wheel
drive with power delivered to all
four wheels, as required, for
increased traction. This is appropriate for all on-road driving
conditions, such as dry road surfaces, wet pavement, snow or gravel.
• 4H (4X4 HIGH) provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive power
to front and rear wheels. The “4X4” light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster when this position is selected. This position is not recommended
for use on dry pavement. This position is only intended for severe winter
or off-road conditions, such as deep snow, ice or shallow sand.
• 4L (4X4 LOW) provides mechanically locked four-wheel drive when
extra power at reduced speeds is required. The “4X4 LOW” light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster when this position is selected.
This position is not recommended for use on dry pavement. Use this
position for off-road low-speed operation or when extra power is
required, such as climbing steep grades, going through deep sand or
pulling a boat out of the water.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac娂, the AdvanceTrac娂
system will automatically turn off the stability enhancement feature when
you shift the Control Trac A4WD system into 4L (4X4 LOW). The brake
traction enhancement feature will still be enabled.
The AdvanceTrac娂 stability enhancement system can be turned off
manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac娂 button (refer to AdvanceTrac娂
Stability Enhancement System in this chapter) while operating in 2H,
A4WD or 4H while driving in deep sand, very deep snow or more
strenuous off-road maneuvers. This will disable the engine management
feature, allowing the vehicle to maintain full power and enhanced
momentum through the obstacle.
209
Driving
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not designed for
cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in these
vehicles.
Note: The Control Trac selector knob should not be changed while the
rear wheels are slipping.
Using the Control Trac system
Shifting from 2H to A4WD or 4H
Move the control to the A4WD or
4H position at any forward speed up
to 88 km/h (55 mph). The “4X4”
light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate if 4H is selected.
Shifting from A4WD to 4H
Move the control from A4WD to 4H
at a stop or while driving at any
speed.
210
Driving
Shifting from 2H, A4WD or 4H to 4L
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop and
keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
3. Move the control to the 4L
position.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages.
Shifting from 4L to 4H, A4WD or 2H
1. Bring the vehicle to a stop and
keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
3. Move the control to the 4H,
A4WD or 2H position.
Note: Some noise may be heard as
the system shifts or engages.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
Four–wheel drive vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand,
snow, mud and rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
The AdvanceTrac娂 stability enhancement system can be turned off
manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac娂 button (refer to AdvanceTrac娂
Stability Enhancement System in this chapter) while operating in 2H,
A4WD or 4H while driving in deep sand, very deep snow or more
strenuous off-road maneuvers. This will disable the engine management
feature, allowing the vehicle to maintain full power and enhanced
momentum through the obstacle.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
211
Driving
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4H (4x4 HIGH) or 4L (4x4 LOW) on dry, hard surfaced
roads. This may damage the drivelines and axles.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application. Ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small inanimate objects, such as
highway reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your
safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
212
Driving
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
Do not spin the wheels at over 56 km/h (35 mph). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking. Use all
available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Control Trac four–wheel drive system
When a four–wheel drive mode is selected, the Control Trac system uses
all four wheels to power the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional
two-wheel drive vehicle can’t.
213
Driving
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On
four–wheel drive vehicles, the
transfer case allows you to select
four–wheel drive when necessary.
Information on transfer case
operation and shifting procedures
can be found in this chapter.
Information on transfer case maintenance can be found in the
Maintenance and specifications chapter. You should become
thoroughly familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some four–wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive
to four–wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some
momentary clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain
coming up to speed and engaging the front wheels, and is not cause for
concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac娂, press the AdvanceTrac娂
button (refer to AdvanceTrac娂 Stability Enhancement System in this
chapter) while driving in deep sand if you experience excessive engine
power reduction.
214
Driving
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even four–wheel drive vehicles can lose traction in
slick mud. As when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator
slowly and avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
215
Driving
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a
steep hill, avoid sudden hard
braking as you could lose control.
When you brake hard, the front
wheels can’t turn and if they aren’t
turning, you won’t be able to steer.
The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle. Rapid
pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle and still
maintain steering control.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
“pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
Four–wheel drive vehicles have advantages over two–wheel drive
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
216
Driving
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a four–wheel drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t
stop any faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four
wheels. Do not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping as well as drive slower than usual and consider using one of
the lower gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake
forcefully and steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes
section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the
anti-lock brake system.
Tires, Replacement Requirements
Do not use a size and type of tire and wheel other than that
originally provided by Ford Motor Company because it can affect
the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could lead to loss of
vehicle control or roll over and serious injury.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand and load-carrying capacity. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealer.
If you nevertheless decide to equip your four–wheel drive for off-road
use with tires larger than what Ford Motor Company recommends, you
should not use these tires for highway driving.
If you use any tire/wheel combination not recommended by Ford Motor
Company, it may adversely affect vehicle handling and could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case failure.
Do not use “aftermarket lift kits” or other suspension modifications,
whether or not they are used with larger tires and wheels.
These “aftermarket lift kits” could adversely affect the vehicle’s handling
characteristics, which could lead to loss of vehicle control or roll over
and serious injury.
Tires can be damaged during off-road use. For your safety, tires that are
damaged should not be used for highway driving because they are more
likely to blow out or fail.
You should carefully observe the recommended tire inflation pressure
found on the safety compliance certification label attached to the left
217
Driving
front door latch post pillar (a label may also be found on the fuel cap
filler door). Failure to follow tire pressure recommendations can
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles. Do not exceed the Ford
Motor Company recommended pressure even if it is less than the
maximum pressure allowed for the tire.
Each day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires, and adjust if
required. Check tire pressure with a
tire gauge every few weeks
(including spare). Safe operation
requires tires that are neither
underinflated nor overloaded.
Periodically inspect the tire treads and remove stones, nails, glass or
other objects that may be wedged in the tread grooves. Check for holes
or cuts that may permit air leakage from the tire and make necessary
repairs.
Inspect the tire side walls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If internal
damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected
to determine whether it needs to be repaired or replaced.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide both reliable and reasonably predictable
performance whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor Company strongly recommends
that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts
(such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts not
equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
218
Driving
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine.
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water that is higher than the bottom of the
hubs (for trucks) or the bottom of the wheel rims (for cars).
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause
internal transmission damage. Have the fluid checked and, if
water is found, replace the fluid.
VEHICLE LOADING
Before loading a vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms:
• Base Curb Weight: Weight of the vehicle including any standard
equipment, fluids, lubricants, etc. It does not include occupants or
aftermarket equipment.
• Payload: Combined maximum allowable weight of cargo, occupants
and optional equipment. The payload equals the gross vehicle weight
rating minus base curb weight.
• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): Base curb weight plus payload
weight. The GVW is not a limit or a specification.
• GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): Maximum permissible total
weight of the base vehicle, occupants, optional equipment and cargo.
The GVWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the Safety
Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar.
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): Carrying capacity for each axle
system. The GAWR is specific to each vehicle and is listed on the
Safety Certification Label on the driver’s door pillar.
• GCW (Gross Combined Weight): The combined weight of the
towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo) and the loaded trailer.
• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating): Maximum permissible
combined weight of towing vehicle (including occupants and cargo)
and the loaded trailer
219
Driving
• Maximum Trailer Weight Rating: Maximum weight of a trailer the
vehicle is permitted to tow. The maximum trailer weight rating is
determined by subtracting the vehicle curb weight for each
engine/transmission combination, any required option weight for trailer
towing and the weight of the driver from the GCWR for the towing
vehicle.
• Maximum Trailer Weight: Maximum weight of a trailer the loaded
vehicle (including occupants and cargo) is permitted to tow. It is
determined by subtracting the weight of the loaded trailer towing
vehicle from the GCWR for the towing vehicle.
• Trailer Weight Range: Specified weight range that the trailer must
fall within that ranges from zero to the maximum trailer weight rating.
Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded trailer when
figuring the total weight.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the
originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the originals do
not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
The Safety Certification Label, found on the driver’s door pillar, lists
several important vehicle weight rating limitations. Before adding any
additional equipment, refer to these limitations. If you are adding weight
to the front of your vehicle, (potentially including weight added to the
cab), the weight added should not exceed the front axle reserve capacity
(FARC). Additional frontal weight may be added to the front axle reserve
capacity provided you limit your payload in other ways (i.e. restrict the
number of occupants or amount of cargo carried).
Always ensure that the weight of occupants, cargo and equipment being
carried is within the weight limitations that have been established for
your vehicle including both gross vehicle weight and front and rear gross
axle weight rating limits. Under no circumstance should these limitations
be exceeded.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
220
Driving
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
this chapter.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle has the capability to haul more cargo and people than most
passenger cars. Depending upon the type and placement of the load,
hauling cargo and people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Calculating the load your vehicle can carry/tow
1. Use the appropriate maximum gross combined weight rating (GCWR)
chart (in the Trailer Towing section) to find the maximum GCWR for
your type engine and rear axle ratio.
2. Weigh your vehicle as you customarily operate the vehicle without
cargo. To obtain correct weights, try taking your vehicle to a shipping
company or an inspection station for trucks.
3. Subtract your loaded vehicle weight from the maximum GCWR on the
following charts. This is the maximum trailer weight your vehicle can tow
and must fall below the maximum shown under maximum trailer weight
on the chart.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing puts additional loads
on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires, and
suspension. For your safety and to
maximize vehicle performance, be
sure to use the proper equipment
while towing.
Follow these guidelines to ensure
safe towing procedure:
• Stay within your vehicle’s load limits. If exceeded, cargo should be
removed from the trailer and/or the vehicle until all weights are within
specified limits.
221
Driving
• Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing. Refer to Preparing to
tow in this chapter.
• Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing. Refer to Driving
while you tow in this chapter.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. Refer to the
severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide.
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 800 km
(500 miles).
• Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the
proper installation and adjustment specifications.
Your vehicle is equipped with heavy duty trailer tow wiring. An electrical
connector is provided under the instrument panel for installing a
customer-supplied electric brake controller. A Class I (4–pin) electrical
connector and Class II/III/IV (7–pin) electrical connector are provided at
the hitch. These connectors provide power to the trailer for taillamps,
stop and turn lamps, back up lamps, battery charge, electric brakes
(when a customer provided controller is installed) and ground. A kit
containing a wiring harness/adapter and installation instructions to attach
an electric brake controller may be obtained from any Ford or
Lincoln/Mercury dealer (part number 5A416). Before towing a trailer,
make sure the trailer brakes (if equipped) and lamps are properly
connected and functional. Refer to the brake controller instructions to
check for trailer brake functionality.
Engine
Rear axle
ratio
Maximum GCWR kg (lbs.)
Trailer weight
range (0 maximum) kg
(lbs.)
4x2
5216 (11500)
0-2819 (0-6215)
6577 (14500)
0–4037 (0–8900)
4x4
4.6L
All
5216 (11500)
0-2639 (0-5819)
5.4L
All
6577 (14500)
0–3945 (0–8699)
Maximum frontal area of trailer is 5.6 square meters (60 square feet)
4.6L
5.4L
All
All
Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. For load specification terms found on the label, refer
to Vehicle loading in this chapter. Remember to figure in the tongue
load of your loaded trailer when figuring the total weight.
222
Driving
If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac娂, you may experience
AdvanceTrac娂 activations during typical cornering maneuvers with a
heavily loaded trailer; this is normal. Cornering at a slower speed while
towing will reduce the tendency of the AdvanceTrac娂 stability
enhancement system to activate.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of control
and personal injury.
Integrated hitch rating
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of
operation:
• Weight carrying - requires a draw bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight distributing - requires an aftermarket weight distributing
system which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring bars and snap-up
brackets. The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between
the truck and the trailer by this system.
Mode
Maximum
Maximum
Gross Trailer Tongue Weight
Weight - kg
- kg (lbs.)
(lbs.)
Weight carrying
2721 (6000)
272 (600)
Weight distributing
4014 (8850)
401 (885)
These are hitch ratings only; actual vehicle ratings are dependent on
engine, transmission and axle combinations.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight exceeds the
limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle structural
damage, loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer, and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Hitches
Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle’s bumper or attach to the
axle. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10%–15% of the
total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
223
Driving
Load equalizing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition in the
ON position, apply the brake and place the gearshift lever in
(Overdrive) for 10 seconds, then return the gearshift lever to P (Park)
and release the brake. With the ignition still in the ON position, and all
doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand (without passengers) for several
minutes so that it can level.
2. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to OFF.
3. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
4. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within 0–13 mm (0.5 in) of the reference
point. After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher
than in Step 3.
5. Turn the air suspension (if equipped) control to ON.
Note: Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is
higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load
equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
224
Driving
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure your
trailer lamps conform to local and Federal regulations. See your dealer or
trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking
up trailer lamps.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the
Driving with a 4–speed automatic transmission section in this
chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for
more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 80 km (50 miles), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
225
Driving
Launching or retrieving a boat
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the
trailer is removed from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• do not allow waves to break higher than 15 cm (6 inches) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• causing internal damage to the components.
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a
motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for recreational
towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. These guidelines
are designed to ensure that your transmission is not damaged.
2WD vehicles (with automatic transmissions):
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral)
• Maximum speed is 56 km (35 mph)
• Maximum distance is 80 km (50 miles)
If a distance of 80 km (50 miles) or a speed of 56 km (35 mph) must be
exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is
towed.
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified
technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
Vehicles equipped with Control Trac four-wheel drive system:
Vehicles equipped with the Control Trac four-wheel drive system cannot be
towed with any wheels on the ground. See your local dealer if you must
flat-tow a vehicle equipped with the Control Trac four-wheel drive system.
226
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 60,000
km (36,000 miles), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 80,000 km (50,000 miles) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• changing a flat tire.
• jump-starts.
• lock-out assistance.
• limited fuel delivery.
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 56.3 km (35 miles) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents or getting stuck in the
mud or snow, are covered (some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• Coverage period
• Exact fuel amounts
• Towing of your disabled vehicle
• Emergency travel expense reimbursement
• Travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment in Ford vehicles and is
mailed to you if you own a Mercury or Lincoln. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
227
Roadside Emergencies
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER
Use only in an emergency to warn traffic of vehicle breakdown,
approaching danger, etc. The hazard flashers can be operated when the
ignition is off.
• The hazard lights control is
located on top of the steering
column.
• Depress hazard lights control to
activate all hazard flashers
simultaneously.
• Depress control again to turn the
flashers off.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
FUEL
RESET
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
228
Roadside Emergencies
The fuel pump shut-off switch is
located in the left rear quarter trim
panel, near the liftgate. The switch
is located behind two access panels;
the second panel has a tab that
needs to be pushed down to remove
the access panel door.
The fuel pump shut-off switch has a
red reset button on top of it and is
located beneath the air suspension
switch (if equipped). If the vehicle
is not equipped with air suspension,
the fuel pump shut-off switch’s red
reset button will still be visible
behind this access panel.
229
Roadside Emergencies
Use the following procedure to reset the fuel pump shut-off switch.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no fuel leak is apparent, reset the fuel pump shut-off switch by
pushing in on the reset button.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position. Pause for a few seconds and
return the key to the OFF position.
5. Make a further check for leaks in the fuel system.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
15
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
2A
3A
4A
5A
7.5A
10A
15A
20A
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Grey
Violet
Pink
Tan
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Yellow
230
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Blue
Blue
Roadside Emergencies
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
25A
30A
40A
50A
60A
70A
80A
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
Natural
Green
—
—
—
—
—
—
Green
Orange
Red
Blue
Tan
Natural
Cartridge
Fuse link
maxi
cartridge
fuses
—
—
Pink
Pink
Green
Green
Red
Red
—
Yellow
—
Brown
—
Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
231
Roadside Emergencies
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
1
Fuse Amp
Rating
10A*
2
20A*
3
7.5A*
4
10A*
5
7.5A*
6
15A*
7
8
7.5A*
10A*
9
10
10A*
20A*
11
12
13
10A*
10A*
10A*
232
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Front wiper motor, Instrument cluster,
Rear wiper motor, Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
Turn signal flasher, Stoplamp switch,
Hazard flasher, IVD (AdvanceTrac)
stoplamps relay
Power mirrors, Memory seat switch,
Memory seat module
DVD player, Rear seat audio controls,
CDDJ
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (KA
power), SC deactivate switch, Manual
climate control mode switch, Stoplamp
switch, Brake-shift interlock (BSI)
solenoid, EATC control head, BSM module,
Speed control servo, 3rd row seat relay
Headlamp switch, Parklamps, License plate
lamps, Trailer tow electric brake controller,
BSM parklamps relay
Radio
Rear window defroster switch, Heated
mirrors
Alternator
Back-up lamps, Back-up lamp relay, Trailer
tow parklamp relay
A/C clutch relay, 4x4 IWE solenoid
Speed control servo, Speed control
EATC control head, Manual climate control
head
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
14
Fuse Amp
Rating
15A*
15
16
17
18
5A*
10A*
15A*
10A*
19
20
10A*
30A*
21
15A*
22
10A*
23
24
10A*
15A*
25
26
27
10A*
20A*
5A*
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Climate control blend door actuator,
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) relays,
Digital Transmission Range Sensor (DTRS)
back-up lamp
AdvanceTrac娂 switch, Instrument cluster
ABS module
Foglamps
Electrochromic mirror, Auxiliary A/C,
Climate-controlled seats module,
Temperature solenoid, Turn signal flasher,
Sunload sensor, Electronic park brake
relay coil
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Air suspension module (air spring
solenoids and height sensors), 4x4 module
Instrument cluster (interior lamps),
Interior lamps, Electronic park brake relay,
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Door lock switch illumination, Moonroof
switch illumination, Radio (delayed
accessory signal), Flip window switch
RH low beam
Battery saver relay, Front map/Dome lamp,
2nd row dome/map lamp, Glove
compartment lamp, Cargo lamp, Rail
lamps, Vanity mirror lamps, Underhood
lamp
LH low beam
Horn relay, Horns
Compass, Reverse sensing system module,
Brake shift interlock (BSI) solenoid,
Overdrive cancel switch, Air suspension
module (Run/Start sense)
233
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
28
29
30
Fuse Amp
Rating
5A*
30A*
30A*
31
32
33
25A*
15A*
20A*
34
20A*
35
20A*
36
37
38
10A*
20A*
25A*
39
20A*
40
20A*
41
42
101
102
103
104
105
20A*
10A*
30A**
30A**
30A**
30A**
30A**
234
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
SecuriLock transceiver
Trailer tow electric brake controller
BSM (door locks), Liftgate glass release
relay, Liftgate glass release motor,
Door/Liftgate locks, Parklamps relay
(BSM), Headlamps relay (BSM), Door
lock/Unlock relay (BSM)
Radio
CMS, Transmission solenoids
Canister vent solenoid, EVR CC, HEGOs,
VMV solenoid, IMTV solenoid, A/C clutch
relay coil
PCM, Fuel injectors, Idle air control (IAC)
solenoid, Mass air flow sensor
Instrument cluster high beam indicator,
High beam headlamps
Trailer tow right turn lamp
Cargo area power point
Rear wiper motor, Washer pump (rear
window wash)
Instrument panel or floor console power
point, Rear console power point
Headlamp switch, High beam relay coil, LH
low beam fuse # 25, LH low beam fuse #
23, BSM (autolamps headlamp relay), DRL
Cigar lighter, OBD II Connector
Trailer tow left turn lamp
Starter relay, Starter solenoid
Ignition switch, Starter solenoid
ABS module (pump motor)
LH 3rd row power seat
Spare
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
401
R01
R02
R03
R04
Fuse Amp
Rating
30A**
30A**
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
Trailer tow battery charge relay
Auxiliary blower relay, Auxiliary blower
motor
30A**
Power passenger seat switch, Passenger
power lumbar switch
30A**
Driver seat motor switch, Driver lumbar
switch, Adjustable pedal switch, Memory
module
30A**
Spare
50A**
Air suspension solid state relay, Air
suspension compressor
30A**
ABS module (valves)
30A**
Front wiper motor, Front washer pump
40A**
Rear window defrost relay, Heated mirrors
(Fuse # 8)
30A**
4x4 module, Transfer case shift motor
40A**
Front blower relay, Front blower motor
30A**
RH 3rd row power seat
30A**
Driver and passenger climate control seat
module
30A**
Power window circuit breaker, Main
window switch, Window motors, Window
switches, Moonroof module
Starter relay Starter motor solenoid
Delayed
Fuse # 22, CB # 401, Power windows,
accessory Switch backlighting, Radio, Moonroof, Flip
relay
windows
Hi-beam
Fuse # 35, Hi-beam headlamps, Hi-beam
relay
indicator, DRL relays
Rear window Fuse # 8 (heated mirrors), Rear window
defroster defroster
relay
235
Roadside Emergencies
Fuse/Relay
Location
R05
R06
R201
R202
R203
Fuse Amp
Rating
T/T battery
charge relay
Front blower
relay
T/T park
lamp relay
Fog lamp
relay
PCM relay
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
Description
TT 7 wire connector, Battery charge
Blower motor, Blower motor speed control
(EATC)
Trailer tow park lamps feed
Front fog lamps
Fuse # 32, Fuse # 33, Fuse # 34, Fuel
pump relay, PCM solenoids and sensors
R301
T/T back-up Back-up lamps, TT connector (back-up
lamp relay lamps), Electrochromic mirror
R302
Speed
Electric cooling fan clutch, Speed control
control relay servo
R303
Fuel pump Fuel pump shut-off switch, PCM fuel
relay
pump monitor, Fuel pump
R304
Battery
Rail lamps, Vanity mirror lamps, Dome
saver relay lamp, Glove box lamp, Instrument cluster
R305
Horn relay Dual note horn
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may compromise the
integrity of your tires. The use of tire sealants may also affect your tire
pressure monitoring system (if equipped).
Spare tire information
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire that may be used as a spare or
a regular tire. The spare is identical to the other tires on your vehicle,
although the wheel may not match.
236
Roadside Emergencies
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Item
Spare tire
Location
Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack tools and jacking instructions Under the access panel located in
the floor compartment behind the
rear seat
Removing the jack and tools
1. Open the liftgate, then locate the access panel behind the rear seat.
Unlatch and remove the panel.
2. Remove the jack and tools assembly tray from the compartment by
turning the T-nut counterclockwise to relieve tension against the jack
assembly tray.
3. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench, jack extension and handle from the
plastic tray. Remove the jack and instruction sheet from the tray
assembly.
Removing the spare tire
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Open the rear access
compartment on the floor behind
the 3rd row seat. Remove the panel
and fold the rear seat down.
3. Remove the jack and tools tray
assembly by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the jack handle and
winch extension from the tray and
assembly them.
5. Remove the spare tire winch
access plug from the bottom of the
compartment located just behind
the 3rd row seat.
6. Insert the winch extension tool
assembly through the access hole in the floor and engage the winch.
237
Roadside Emergencies
7. To remove the spare tire, turn the handle counterclockwise until the
tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack.
8. Slide the retainer through the center of the spare tire wheel.
Tire change procedure
To prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be
sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions) the
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
On vehicles equipped with Air Suspension, turn OFF the Air
Suspension switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing your
vehicle.
Refer to the instruction sheet (located in the rear floor compartment
behind the 3rd row seat with the jack tray tools assembly kit) for
detailed tire change instructions.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Place gearshift lever in P (Park),
turn engine OFF and block the
diagonally opposite wheel. (If
changing the tire on a grade, block
the diagonally opposite wheel on the
downward side of the grade.)
3. Obtain the spare tire and jack
tools from their storage locations.
238
Roadside Emergencies
4. Use the tip of the jack handle to
remove any wheel trim. Loosen each
wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise but do not remove
them until the wheel is raised off
the ground.
5. Position the jack according to the
jack locator arrows found on the
frame and turn the jack handle and
extension tool assembly clockwise.
Lift the vehicle so the tire is no
further than 2.5 cm (1 inch) off the
ground when installing the spare
tire.
When one of the rear wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping off the
jack, even if the transmission is in P (Park). To prevent the vehicle
from moving when you change the tire, be sure that the parking brake
is set and the diagonally opposite wheel is blocked. If the vehicle slips
off the jack, someone could be seriously injured.
• Front
239
Roadside Emergencies
• Rear
To lessen the risk of
personal injury, do not put
any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do
not start the engine when your
vehicle is on the jack. The jack is
only meant for changing the tire.
• Never use the front or rear
differential as a jacking point.
6. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
7. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
8. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
9. Remove the jack and fully tighten
the lug nuts in the order shown and
reinstall the wheel cover.
10. Unblock the wheels.
11. Put flat tire, jack, lug wrench
and tools away. Make sure the jack
is fastened securely so it does not
rattle when you drive.
12. Turn on the air suspension
switch (if equipped).
240
Roadside Emergencies
Stowing the spare tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear of the vehicle, with the valve
stem side facing up.
2. Install the retainer through the
wheel center.
3. Using the jack handle and winch
extension tools, turn the jack handle
clockwise until the tire winch
“overrides.”
Note: The wrench will become
harder to turn until the winch
“overrides.” You will hear a
clicking sound from the winch
when the tire is properly stowed.
The wrench will then become
easier to turn. The winch handle
ratchets (clicks) when the tire is
raised to the stowed position. It
will not allow you to overtighten.
4. Remove the tools from the winch and reinstall the access plug.
Disassemble the tools and snap them back into the tool tray. Reinstall
the tray into the vehicle and secure it with the wing nut by turning the
wing nut until tight.
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes, and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; also, the
catalytic converter may become damaged.
241
Roadside Emergencies
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
242
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
+
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
243
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to the jump
starting stud located in the rear of the engine compartment, near the
battery. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers or the intake
manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
244
Roadside Emergencies
Removing the jumper cables
+
+
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
+
+
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
245
Roadside Emergencies
+
+
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
+
+
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
246
Roadside Emergencies
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member, your roadside assistance center.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor Company has not
approved a slingbelt towing procedure.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
247
Roadside Emergencies
Special Conditions:
• Release the parking brake.
• Turn the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).
• Do not exceed a distance of 80 km (50 miles).
• Do not exceed 56 km/h (35 mph) vehicle speed.
With a disabled vehicle (without access to wheel dollies, car hauling
trailer or flatbed transport vehicle) your vehicle can be towed (all wheels
on the ground) under the following conditions:
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
248
Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada have authorized dealerships to
service your vehicle. It is preferred that you return to the Ford dealer
where your vehicle was purchased when warranty repairs are needed.
However, you may also take your vehicle to another Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada dealership authorized for warranty repairs.
Certain warranty repairs require special training though, so not all
dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. That means that
depending on the warranty repair needed, the vehicle may need to be
taken to another dealer. If a particular dealership can not assist you,
then contact the Customer Relationship Center.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager or Service Manager at the dealership.
3. If the inquiry or concern cannot be resolved at the dealership level,
please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com
249
Customer Assistance
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.ford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
In order to help you service your Ford or Lincoln Mercury vehicle, please
have the following information available when contacting a Customer
Relationship Center:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
250
Customer Assistance
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. Ford ESP
is an optional service contract which is backed by Ford Motor Company
or Ford Motor Service Company (in the U.S.) and Ford of Canada (in
Canada). It provides the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Please contact
your dealer for further information. Since this information is subject to
change, please ask your dealer for complete details about Ford Extended
Service Plan coverage options, or visit the Ford ESP website at
www.ford-esp.com.
251
Customer Assistance
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
252
Customer Assistance
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
253
Customer Assistance
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call to the
Board at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 5120
Southfield, MI 48086–5120
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
254
Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM (CANADA
ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
255
Customer Assistance
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Helm, incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card holders only.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
256
Customer Assistance
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 29 000 km (18 000 miles), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
257
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
258
Cleaning
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your
dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or carwash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained body-side cladding,
roof racks, bumper step surfaces, mirror housings or the windshield
cowl area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
259
Cleaning
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.
In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean with Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available from your dealer.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil
Removal (B7A-19520–AA), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
260
Cleaning
• 4.6L V8 engine
• 5.4L V8 engine
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Ford Extra Strength Tar and
Road Oil Removal (B7A-19520–AA).
261
Cleaning
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear window and wiper blades should be cleaned
regularly. If the wiper does not wipe properly, substances on the
windshield, rear window or the wiper blades may be the cause. These
may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree
sap, or other organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow
these tips:
• The windshield or rear window may be cleaned with a non-abrasive
cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23),
available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the painted surfaces.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Ford Extra Strength Upholstery
Cleaner (E8AZ-19523–AA).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
262
Cleaning
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner.
Remove fresh spots immediately. Clean the seat with a damp cloth, using
a mild soap and water solution, if necessary.
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
263
Cleaning
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Ford Custom Vinyl Protectant* (not available in Canada)
(F2AZ—19530–A)
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-11–A)
Ford Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil Remover* (not available in
Canada) (B7A-19520–AA)
Ford Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(E8AZ-19523–AA)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Ford Premium Car Wash Concentrate (F2SZ-19523–WC)
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Tire Detailer (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)
* May be sold with the Motorcraft name
264
Maintenance and Specifications
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide to find out
which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and
all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels.
265
Maintenance and Specifications
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
266
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
4.6L V8 engines
1. Battery
2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Air filter assembly
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
267
Maintenance and Specifications
5.4L V8 engines
1. Battery
2. Automatic transmission fluid dipstick
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Power steering fluid reservoir
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Brake fluid reservoir
7. Engine coolant reservoir
8. Air filter assembly
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
268
Maintenance and Specifications
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification ESR-M17P5–A.
Refer to Lubricant specifications in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
269
Maintenance and Specifications
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN
mark, add enough oil to raise the
level within the MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
270
Maintenance and Specifications
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Use Motorcraft or an equivalent oil meeting
Ford specification WSS-M2C153–H. SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum
fuel economy and durability performance meeting all
requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
271
Maintenance and Specifications
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
272
Maintenance and Specifications
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected see “Shift strategy” in the driving section.
To account for customer driving habits and conditions, your automatic
transmission (4R70W) electronically controls the shift quality by using an
adaptive learning strategy. The adaptive learning strategy is maintained
by power from the battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new
battery is installed, the transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy.
Optimal shifting will resume within a few hundred kilometers (miles) of
operation.
If the shift quality does not improve within a few hundred
kilometers (miles) of operation, or if the downshifts and other
throttle conditions do not function normally or after a long
deceleration period, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician as soon as possible.
Because your vehicle’s engine is also electronically controlled by a
computer, some control conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed,
the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum
driveability and performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
273
Maintenance and Specifications
RN
LE
TU
AD
RE
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A/C on, put the
vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 16 km (10 miles) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
RECYCLE
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance guide. The coolant
concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and water, which
equates to a freeze point of -36° C (-34° F). Coolant concentration
testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester (such as the
Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The level of coolant
should be maintained at the “cold full” of “cold fill range” level in the
coolant reservoir. If the level falls below, add coolant per the instructions
in the Adding engine coolant section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
274
Maintenance and Specifications
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -36° C (-34° F).
• Boiling protection up to 129° C (265° F).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon
application).
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
275
Maintenance and Specifications
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with either green-colored
Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant meeting Ford specification
ESE-M97B44–A or yellow-colored Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine
Coolant meeting Ford Specification WSS-M97B51–A1. To determine your
vehicle’s coolant type (color), check your coolant reservoir.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored),
VC-4–A (U.S.) or CXC-10 (Canada) or Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored), VC-7–A (VC-7–B in
Oregon), depending on the type of coolant originally equipped
in your vehicle. If you are unsure which type of coolant your vehicle
requires, check your coolant reservoir or contact your local dealer.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6,
darkens the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
276
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
• Do not mix with recycled coolant unless from a Ford-approved
recycling process (see Use of Recycled engine coolant section).
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “cold full” level. For all other vehicles, which have a coolant
degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to remove the
coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow
system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (an opaque plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “cold fill range” or the “cold full” level on the
reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill the
radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer
to Checking Engine Coolant section. If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
277
Maintenance and Specifications
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 liter (1.0 quart) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a recycled engine coolant
produced by Ford-approved processes in vehicles originally equipped
with Motorcraft Premium Engine Coolant (green-colored). However, not
all coolant recycling processes produce coolant that meets Ford
specification ESE-M97B44–A. Use of such coolant may harm the engine
and cooling system components.
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this chapter.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this chapter.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –36° C [–34° F]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
278
Maintenance and Specifications
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The HI TEMP/LOW OIL indicator
will illuminate.
• The “Service Engine Soon”
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
H
C
279
Maintenance and Specifications
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature:
• The engine will completely shut down.
• Steering and braking effort will increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
280
Maintenance and Specifications
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
281
Maintenance and Specifications
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors, or
skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive individuals,
serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is splashed on the
skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.
282
Maintenance and Specifications
If ”Check fuel cap” displays in the message center or the ”Service Engine
Soon” indicator (vehicle without message center) comes on and stays on
after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based compounds containing MMT.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
(R+M)/2 METHOD
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
87
283
Maintenance and Specifications
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems during a cold start, try a different brand of gasoline. If the
problems persist, see your dealer or a qualified service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers
issued the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline
specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control
system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide
Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier
about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter. In Canada,
look for fuels that display the Auto Makers’ Choice娂 logo.
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
• Your “Service Engine Soon” indicator may come on. For more
information on the “Service Engine Soon” indicator, refer to the
Instrument cluster chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.
284
Maintenance and Specifications
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 600 km (1 000
miles) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 3 000 km–5 000 km (2 000 miles-3 000 miles).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
285
Maintenance and Specifications
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in kilometers or miles).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in liters
or gallons).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total kilometers
traveled.
Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 88 km/h [55 mph] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 105 km/h [65 mph]).
286
Maintenance and Specifications
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (as much as
0.4 km/L [1 mpg] is lost for every 180 kg [400 lb] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
12–16 km (8–10 miles) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
287
Maintenance and Specifications
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the range of fuel economy expected on
the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy may vary
depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your scheduled maintenance guide performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance
guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the “Service Engine Soon” light, charging system warning
light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system
is not working properly.
288
Maintenance and Specifications
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up
specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your “Check Engine/Service Engine
Soon” light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the “Check Engine/Service Engine Soon” light on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use
only Ford Premium Power Steering Fluid or MERCON威 ATF.
289
Maintenance and Specifications
1. Start the engine and let it run
until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area
between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the
steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the
reservoir. It should be between the
MIN and MAX lines. Do not add
fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in
small amounts, continuously
checking the level until it reaches
the range between the MIN and
MAX lines. Be sure to put the cap
back on the reservoir.
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
BRAKE FLUID
Checking and adding brake fluid
Brake fluid should be checked and
refilled as needed. Refer to the
scheduled maintenance guide for
the service interval schedules.
1. Clean the reservoir cap before
removal to prevent dirt or water
from entering the reservoir.
290
Maintenance and Specifications
2. Visually inspect the fluid level.
3. If necessary, add brake fluid from
a clean un-opened container until
MAX
the level reaches MAX. Do not fill
above this line.
MIN
4. Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid
certified to meet Ford specification ESA-M6C25–A. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the eyes, flush eyes
with running water for 15 minutes. Seek medical attention if
irritation persists. If taken internally, drink water and induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will cause
permanent damage to your brakes.
Do not let the fluid level in the reservoir for the master cylinder
fall below the MIN mark. If master cylinder runs dry, this may
cause the brakes to fail.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid
Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
291
Maintenance and Specifications
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F).
ADD
COLD
HOT
DO NOT ADD
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating
temperature 66°C-77°C (150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after approximately 30 km (20
miles) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
ADD
COLD
HOT
DO NOT ADD
temperature (66°C-77°C
[150°F-170°F]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
ADD
COLD
HOT
DO NOT ADD
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]).
292
Maintenance and Specifications
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
ADD
COLD
HOT
DO NOT ADD
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
If necessary, add fluid in 250 mL (1/2 pint) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
ADD
COLD
HOT
DO NOT ADD
technician.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause shift and/or engagement concerns
and/or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require
lubrication. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for maintenance
intervals. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal joints
equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft Part Numbers.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
293
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing the air filter element
1. Loosen the clamp that secures
the air inlet tube to the engine air
filter cover and disconnect the tube
from the cover.
2. Loosen the clamp that secures
the air filter cover to the air filter
housing and carefully separate the
cover from housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
4. Install a new air filter element. Be careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter housing and cover. This could cause
filter damage and allow unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly
seated.
5. Replace the air filter cover and secure the clamp.
6. Replace the air inlet tube and secure the clamp.
294
Maintenance and Specifications
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
295
Maintenance and Specifications
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
SERVICING YOUR TIRES
Checking the tire pressure
• Use an accurate tire pressure gauge.
• Check the tire pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or has been driven less than 5 km (3
miles). As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing
the tire pressure.
• Adjust tire pressure to recommended specifications found on the
Certification Label. Tire pressure information can also be found on the
Tire Information label located on the inside of the fuel filler door.
• Check tires for proper air pressure monthly. Check spare tire for
proper air pressure every six months.
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, possibly resulting in loss of vehicle control.
296
Maintenance and Specifications
Tire rotation
Because your vehicle’s tires perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly and last longer, rotate
them as indicated in the scheduled maintenance guide. If you notice that
the tires wear unevenly, have them checked.
• Four tire rotation
Replacing the tires
Replace the tires when the wear
band is visible through the tire
treads.
When replacing full size tires, never mix radial bias-belted, or
bias-type tires. Use only the tire sizes that are listed on the
Certification Label. Make sure that all tires are the same size, speed
rating, and load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire combinations
recommended on the label. If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle may not drive properly and safely.
297
Maintenance and Specifications
Make sure that all replacement tires are of the same size, type,
load-carrying capacity and tread design (e.g., “All Terrain”,
“Touring”, etc.), as originally offered by Ford.
Do not replace your tires with “high performance” tires or larger
size tires.
Failure to follow these precautions may adversely affect the
handling of the vehicle and make it easier for the driver to lose
control and roll over.
Tires that are larger or smaller than your vehicle’s original tires may also
affect the accuracy of your speedometer.
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system provides the driver with a warning
message indicating when tire pressure is severely low or high. This
system is a supplement to normal tire maintenance including regular
manual inspections. The device will inform the operator of severe low or
high inflation pressures, but may not illuminate for less severe
discrepancies in inflation pressure.
The system uses radio-frequency pressure sensors to monitor the tire
pressure on all tires including the spare. The sensors transmit the tire
pressure readings to the receiver module located in the vehicle. The
receiver module then transmits the status to the message center. For
more tire warning information, refer to the Message Center in the
Driver controls chapter.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a substitute for
checking tire pressure. The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge, see Checking the
tire pressure in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your tire
pressure could increase the risk of tire failure and the potential for
personal injury.
298
Maintenance and Specifications
Changing tires with TPMS
It is recommended that you always
have your tires serviced by a dealer
or qualified technician. Each tire is
equipped with a tire pressure
sensor mounted on the wheel
inside the tire behind the valve
stem. The tire pressure sensor
must be unbolted from the wheel prior to tire removal. The
sensor can be removed by loosening the nut at the valve stem.
Failure to remove the sensor may damage it. The rubber grommet
(washer) between the wheel and the tire pressure sensor needs to be
replaced when any tire is changed to minimize air leaks.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, refer to Checking the tire pressure in this chapter.
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only cable type chains or chains offered by Ford as an accessory
or equivalent. Other conventional link type chains may contact and
cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front wheels. Chains on the front wheels
may interfere with suspension components.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
299
Maintenance and Specifications
• Do not exceed 48 km/h (30 mph) with tire chains on your vehicle.
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component
Air filter element
Battery
Fuel filter
Oil filter
PCV valve
Spark plugs*
4.6L V8 engine
FA-1634
BTX-65-650
FG-986B
FL-820-S
EV-233
AWSF-32P
5.4L V8 engine
FA-1634
BTX-65-650
FG-986B
FL-820-S
EV-238
AGSF-22WM
* Refer to Vehicle Emissions Control Information (VECI) decal for spark
plug gap information.
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid
Brake fluid
Ford Part Name
Motorcraft High
Performance DOT 3
Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Engine oil
Motorcraft SAE
(includes filter 5W—20 Premium
change)
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
Fuel tank
N/A
Application
All
Capacity
Fill to line on
reservoir
All
5.7L (6.0
quarts)
106L (28.0
gallons)
Power steering Motorcraft MERCON All
Fill to line on
fluid
威 ATF
reservoir
Transmission
Motorcraft
4R70W
13.1L (13.9
fluid 1
MERCON威V ATF
quarts) 2
Transfer case
Motorcraft
4x4 vehicles
1.9L (2.0
fluid
MERCON威 ATF
quarts)
Engine coolant Motorcraft Premium 4.6L V8 engine 21.8L (23.0
3
Engine Coolant
with 1 row
quarts)
(green-colored) or
radiator
Motorcraft Premium
Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
300
All
Maintenance and Specifications
Fluid
Front axle
lubricant
Rear axle
lubricant 4
Ford Part Name
Motorcraft SAE
75W-90 Premium 4x4
Front Axle Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE
75W-90 Fuel
Efficient High
Performance
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear Axle
Lubricant
Windshield
washer fluid
Motorcraft
Ultra-Clear
Windshield Washer
Concentrate
Application
5.4L V8 engine
with 1 row
radiator
4.6L V8 engine
with 1 row
radiator and
aux rear heat
5.4L V8 engine
with 1 row
radiator and
aux rear heat
4x4 vehicles
Capacity
24.1L (25.5
quarts)
Conventional
differential
(8.8 inch axle)
Conventional
differential
(9.75 inch
axle)
Limited-slip
differential
(8.8 inch
axle)5
Limited-slip
differential
(9.75 inch
axle)5
All
1.66L (3.5
pints)
23.5L (24.8
quarts)
26.4L (27.9
quarts)
1.8-2.0L
(3.5-3.7 pints)
1.90L (4.0
pints)
1.77L (3.75
pints)5
1.77L (3.75
pints)5
4.1L (4.5
quarts)
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine
the correct service interval.
301
Maintenance and Specifications
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON威 type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON威 V type fluid.
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V type fluids are not interchangeable.
DO NOT mix MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. Use of a transmission
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON威 and MERCON威 V) in
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON威 may
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
2
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipstick’s normal operating range.
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and
is considered lubricated for life. These lubricants are not to be checked
or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the axle has
been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time
the axle has been submerged in water.
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 9mm to
12mm (3/8 inch to 1/2 inch) below the bottom of the filler hole.
5
Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 (or equivalent)
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118–A for complete refill of Limited
Slip axles.
302
Maintenance and Specifications
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Ford part
name
Multi-Purpose
Grease
Hinges, latches,
striker plates
and rotors, seat
tracks, fuel filler
door hinge and
spring
Lock cylinders, Penetrating and
swing-away
Lock Lubricant
spare tire carrier
padlock
Brake fluid
Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
Driveshaft, slip Premium Long
spline, double
Life Grease
Cardan joint
center ball
Engine coolant
Motorcraft
Premium Engine
Coolant
(green-colored)
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
Engine oil
Motorcraft SAE
5W20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
Ford part
Ford
number
specification
XG-4 or
ESR-M1C159-A
F5AZ-19G209-AA
Motorcaft XL-1
none
PM-1
ESA-M6C25-A
and DOT 3
XG-1-K or
XG-1-C or
XG-1-T
ESA-M1C75-B
VC-4–A (US) or
CXC-10
(Canada)
ESE-M97B44-A
VC-7–A
WSS-M97B51-A1
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C153-H
with API
Certification
Mark
303
Maintenance and Specifications
Ford part
Ford part
name
number
4x4 front wheel High
E8TZ-19590-A
bearings, 4x4
Temperature
spindle needle
4x4 Front Axle
bearings, spindle & Wheel Bearing
thrust bearings Grease
& front drive
axle u-joint/slip
spline
Automatic
Motorcraft
XT-5-QM
transmission 1
MERCON威V
ATF
Power steering Motorcraft
fluid
MERCON威 ATF XT-2-QDX
Rear axle
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W90–QFEHP
75W-90 Fuel
Efficient High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lube
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W140–QL
75W-140 High
Performance
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lube
Front axle
Motorcraft SAE XY-75W90-TQL
(4X4)
75W-90
Premium 4x4
Front Axle
Lubricant
Transfer case
Motorcraft
XT-2-QDX
(4X4)
MERCON威 ATF
Windshield
Motorcraft
ZC-18–A
washer fluid
Ultra-clear
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
Item
304
Ford
specification
ESA-M1C198-A
MERCON威V
MERCON威
meets API GL-5
WSL-M2C192-A
WSP-M2C201-A
MERCON威
ESR-M17P5-A
Maintenance and Specifications
1
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the dipstick or on the dipstick
handle. Check the container to verify the fluid being added is of the
correct type. Refer to your scheduled maintenance guide to determine
the correct service interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON威 type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON威 V type fluid.
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V type fluids are not interchangeable.
DO NOT mix MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. Use of a transmission
fluid that indicates dual usage (MERCON威 and MERCON威 V) in
an automatic transmission application requiring MERCON威 may
cause transmission damage. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
ENGINE DATA
Engine
Cubic inches
Required fuel
Firing order
Spark plug gap
Ignition system
Compression ratio
4.6L V8 engine
281
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
1.3-1.4 mm
(0.052-0.056 inch)
Coil on plug
9.37:1
5.4L V8 engine
330
87 octane
1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
1.3-1.4 mm
(0.052-0.056 inch)
Coil on plug
9.0:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
Vehicle dimensions 4x2 mm (in)
(1) Overall length
5228
(205.8)
(2) Vehicle width
2000
(Body)
(78.7)
(2) Vehicle width
2390
including mirrors
(94.1)
4x4 mm (in)
5228
(205.8)
2000
(78.7)
2390
(94.1)
305
Maintenance and Specifications
Vehicle dimensions
(2) Vehicle width
with mirrors folded
(2) Vehicle width
with optional
running boards
(3) Overall height
(with roof rack)
(4) Wheelbase
(5) Track - Front
(5) Track - Rear
4x2 mm (in)
2029
(79.9)
2074
(81.7)
4x4 mm (in)
2029
(79.9)
2074
(81.7)
1971
(77.6)
3023
(119.0)
1701
(67.0)
1708
(67.3)
1966
(77.4)
3023
(119.0)
1701
(67.0)
1708
(67.3)
4
1
306
Maintenance and Specifications
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the front door latch pillar on the
driver’s side.
307
Maintenance and Specifications
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block and transmission.
308
Accessories
FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of genuine Ford accessories are available for your
vehicle through your local authorized Ford, Lincoln, Mercury or Ford of
Canada dealer. These quality accessories have been specifically
engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom designed to
complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle. In
addition, each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets
or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and safety specifications. Ford
Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Ford
accessory found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory will be warranted for
whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 20 000 km (12 000 miles) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that genuine Ford accessories purchased along with your
new vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of
your New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 60 000 km (36 000
miles) (whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a
copy of the warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
Vehicle Security
Wheel protector locks
Vehicle security systems
Comfort and convenience
Battery warmer
Cargo organizers
Cargo trays
Carpeted cargo mat
Chrome running boards
Dash trim (wood grain)
Door edge edge guards
Engine block heaters
Rear seat entertainment system – DVD
Remote Start System
309
Accessories
Trailgate table
Tail lamp surrounds (chrome)
Tire step
Swivel hitch/quick step
Travel equipment
Bike rack
Canoe carrier
Daytime running lights (DRL)
Factory luggage rack adaptors
First aid kit
Fog lights
Framed luggage covers
Hard shell cargo box
Highway safety kit
Hitch mount bike carrier
Kayak carrier
Mega Warrior carrier basket
Pet guard/divider
Removable luggage rack (Track rider bars)
Removable luggage rack adapters
Ski/snowboard carrier
Soft luggage cover
Trailer hitch bars and balls
Trailer hitch receiver cover
310
Accessories
Protection and appearance equipment
Air bag anti-theft locks
Cargo liners, interior
Carpet floor mats
Fender flares
Front end covers (full and sport)
Full vehicle cover
Hood deflectors
Leather steering wheel
Locking gas cap
Molded splash guards
Molded vinyl floor mats
Moonroof deflector
Rear air deflectors
Scuff plates-stainless steel
Side window air deflectors
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
compliance certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems - such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
311
Accessories
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use or are not properly installed. When operated, such systems may
cause the engine to stumble or stall or cause the transmission to be
damaged or operate improperly. In addition, such systems may be
damaged or their performance may be affected by operating your
vehicle. (Citizens band [CB] transceivers, garage door openers and
other transmitters with outputs of five watts or less will not ordinarily
affect your vehicle’s operation.)
• Ford cannot assume responsibility for any adverse effects or damage
that may result from the use of such equipment.
• Do not install equipment which modifies the vehicles suspension or
steering. Such modifications can cause adverse effects to the
AdvanceTrac system.
• Do not install a loudspeaker in the area of the front floor console or
under the front driver or passenger seats. The speaker vibrations can
adversely effect the AdvanceTrac sensors.
312
Index
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................195
Accessory delay ........................100
Air bag supplemental
restraint system ........168–169, 173
and child safety seats ............170
description ......................169, 173
disposal ....................................176
driver air bag ..................171, 174
indicator light ...........12, 172, 176
operation .........................171, 174
passenger air bag ...........171, 174
Air cleaner filter .......293–294, 300
Air conditioning ..........................72
auxiliary heater and air
conditioner ................................78
manual heating and air
conditioning system .................69
Air suspension
warning light .............................14
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................274
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................195–196
Armrests ....................................142
Audio system
(see Radio) ................19, 27, 37–38
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................203
fluid, adding ............................291
fluid, checking ........................291
fluid, refill capacities ..............300
fluid, specification ..................305
Auxiliary power point .................97
Axle
lubricant
specifications ..................303, 305
refill capacities ........................300
B
Battery .......................................272
acid, treating emergencies .....272
charging system warning
light ............................................12
jumping a disabled battery ....241
maintenance-free ....................272
replacement, specifications ...300
servicing ..................................272
voltage gauge ............................16
BeltMinder .................................164
Brakes ........................................195
anti-lock ...........................195–196
anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light .........11, 196
brake warning light ..................11
fluid, checking and adding ....290
fluid, refill capacities ..............300
fluid, specifications .........303, 305
lubricant
specifications ..................303, 305
parking ....................................196
pedals (see Power
adjustable foot pedals) ..102, 125
shift interlock ..................202, 206
Break-in period .............................6
Bulbs ............................................86
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....300
CD-6 disc .....................................38
CD-single premium ...............19, 27
Certification Label ....................307
313
Index
Changing a tire .........................236
Child safety restraints ..............177
child safety belts ....................177
Child safety seats ......................180
in front seat ............................181
in rear seat ......................181, 184
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............260
instrument panel ....................262
interior .............................262–263
plastic parts ............................261
washing ....................................259
waxing .....................................259
wheels ......................................260
wiper blades ............................262
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......69, 72
Clock ................................23, 34, 43
Compass, electronic ..........100, 112
calibration ...............................113
set zone adjustment .......113, 115
Console ......................................125
overhead ..............................95, 97
Controls
power seat ...............................143
steering column ......................106
Coolant
checking and adding ..............274
refill capacities ................278, 300
specifications ..................303, 305
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ..................103
Customer Assistance ................227
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................264
Ford Extended Service Plan .251
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............255
314
Getting roadside assistance ...227
Getting the service
you need .................................249
Ordering additional
owner’s literature ...................256
The Dispute Settlement
Board .......................................252
Utilizing the Mediation/
Arbitration Program ...............255
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................82
Defrost
rear window ..............................80
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................291
engine oil .................................269
Doors
door ajar warning ...............13, 15
lubricant specifications ..........303
Driveline universal joint
and slip yoke .............................293
Driving under special
conditions ..........................212, 215
sand .........................................214
snow and ice ...........................216
through water .................215, 219
E
Electronic message center .......114
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................241
Emission control system ..........288
Engine ........................................305
check engine/service engine
soon light ..................................10
Index
cleaning ...................................260
coolant .....................................274
fail-safe coolant ......................279
idle speed control ...................272
lubrication
specifications ..................303, 305
refill capacities ........................300
service points ..................267–268
starting after a collision .........228
Engine block heater .................194
Engine oil ..................................269
change oil soon warning,
message center .......................269
checking and adding ..............269
dipstick ....................................269
filter, specifications ........271, 300
recommendations ...................271
refill capacities ........................300
specifications ..................303, 305
Exhaust fumes ..........................194
F
Fail safe cooling ........................279
Floor mats .................................126
Fluid capacities .........................300
Foglamps .....................................81
Four-Wheel Drive
vehicles ................................14, 208
control trac .............................208
description ..............................209
driving off road .......................211
electronic shift ........................210
indicator light .........................208
preparing to drive
your vehicle ............................198
Fuel ............................................280
calculating fuel
economy ..........................116, 285
cap ...........................................282
capacity ...................................300
choosing the right fuel ...........283
comparisons with EPA
fuel economy estimates .........288
detergent in fuel .....................284
filling your vehicle
with fuel ..................280, 282, 285
filter, specifications ........284, 300
fuel pump shut-off switch .....228
gauge .........................................17
improving fuel economy ........285
low fuel warning light ..............12
octane rating ...................283, 305
quality ......................................284
running out of fuel .................284
safety information relating
to automotive fuels ................280
Fuses ..................................230–231
G
Garage door opener ..................108
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............282
Gas mileage
(see Fuel economy) .................285
Gauges .........................................15
battery voltage gauge ...............16
engine coolant temperature
gauge .........................................15
engine oil pressure gauge ........16
fuel gauge ..................................17
odometer ...................................17
speedometer .............................17
tachometer ................................18
trip odometer ............................18
GAWR (Gross Axle
Weight Rating) ..........................219
calculating ...............................221
definition .................................219
driving with a heavy load ......219
location ....................................219
315
Index
GVWR (Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating) ..........................219
calculating .......................219, 221
definition .................................219
driving with a heavy load ......219
location ....................................219
J
H
K
Hazard flashers .........................228
Headlamps ...................................81
aiming ........................................83
autolamp system .......................81
bulb specifications ....................86
daytime running lights .............82
flash to pass ..............................82
high beam ...........................13, 82
replacing bulbs .........................87
turning on and off ....................81
warning chime ..........................14
Heating
heating and air
conditioning system ...........69, 72
HomeLink universal
transceiver (see Garage
door opener) .............108–109, 111
Hood ..........................................266
Keyless entry system
locking and unlocking
doors ........................................137
programming entry code .......135
Keys ...................................137–139
key in ignition chime ...............15
positions of the ignition .........191
I
Ignition ...............................191, 305
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................180
Inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing ..............................289
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................262
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................83
316
Jack ............................................236
positioning ...............................236
storage .....................................236
Jump-starting your vehicle ......241
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................81
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................86
cargo lamps ...............................83
daytime running light ...............82
fog lamps ...................................81
headlamps .................................81
headlamps, flash to pass ..........82
instrument panel, dimming .....83
interior lamps ...............84–85, 87
replacing bulbs ...................86–90
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................84
Liftgate ..............................126, 130
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
AdvanceTrac .............................12
air bag ........................................12
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ....11, 196
brake ..........................................11
charging system ........................12
check coolant ............................13
Index
cruise indicator .........................13
door ajar ....................................13
engine oil pressure ...................13
high beam .................................13
low fuel ......................................12
low washer fluid .......................12
overdrive off ..............................14
safety belt .................................12
service engine soon ..................10
speed control ..........................106
turn signal indicator .................13
Limited-slip axle .......................198
Load limits .................................219
GAWR ......................................219
GVWR ......................................219
trailer towing ..........................219
Loading instructions .................221
Locks
childproof ................................128
doors ........................................128
Lubricant specifications ...303, 305
Lumbar support, seats .............143
M
Message center .........................114
english/metric button .............119
system check button ..............120
warning messages ...................120
Mirrors .........................................95
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ......................................100
fold away .................................102
heated ......................................101
programmable
memory ...........................131, 144
side view mirrors
(power) ...................................101
Moon roof ....................................96
Motorcraft parts ................284, 300
O
Octane rating ............................283
Odometer .....................................17
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................269
Overdrive ...................................124
P
Panic alarm feature,
remote entry system ................130
Parking brake ............................196
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....300
Pedals (see Power
adjustable foot pedals) .............102
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................231
Power door locks ......................128
Power point .................................97
Power steering ..................197–198
fluid, checking and adding ....289
fluid, refill capacity ................300
fluid, specifications .........303, 305
Power Windows ...........................99
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................198
R
Radio ..........................19, 27, 37–38
Radio reception ...........................56
Rear window defroster ...............80
Relays ........................................230
Remote entry system .......129–130
illuminated entry ....................133
locking/unlocking
doors ........................128–130, 135
317
Index
opening the trunk ...................130
panic alarm .............................130
replacement/additional
transmitters .............................132
replacing the batteries ...........132
Reverse sensing system ...........206
Roadside assistance ..................227
Roof rack ...................................127
S
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ............14, 155, 158–162
Safety Canopy ...........................173
Safety defects, reporting ..........258
Safety restraints ........155, 158–162
belt minder .............................164
extension assembly ................167
for adults .........................159–161
for children .....................176–177
lap belt ....................................163
warning light and
chime ...................12, 14, 163–164
Safety seats for children ..........180
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............155
Seats ..........................................141
child safety seats ....................180
climate control ........................144
memory seat ...................131, 144
SecuriLock passive
anti-theft system ...............137–139
Servicing your vehicle ..............265
Snowplowing .................................7
Spare tire (see Changing
the Tire) ....................................236
318
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................300, 305
Special notice
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................303, 305
Speed control ............................103
Speedometer ...............................17
Starting your vehicle ........191–193
jump starting ..........................241
Steering
speed sensitive .......................198
Steering wheel
controls ............................103, 106
T
Tachometer .................................18
Tire warning ..............................298
Tires ...................236, 295–296, 298
changing ..........................236, 238
checking the pressure ............296
replacing ..................................297
rotating ....................................297
snow tires and chains ............299
tire grades ...............................296
treadwear ................................295
Towing .......................................221
recreational towing .................226
trailer towing ..........................221
wrecker ....................................247
Traction control
active light ................................12
Transmission .............................202
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................291
fluid, refill capacities ..............300
Index
lubricant
specifications ..................303, 305
Trip odometer .............................18
Trunk .........................................130
Turn signal ............................13, 84
V
Warning lights (see Lights) .......10
Washer fluid ..............................269
Water, Driving through .............219
Windows
power .........................................99
rear wiper/washer .....................93
W
Windshield washer fluid
and wipers
checking and adding fluid .....269
checking and cleaning ..............93
liftgate reservoir .....................269
operation ...................................92
replacing wiper blades .......93–94
Warning chimes .....................14–15
Wrecker towing .........................247
Vehicle dimensions ...................305
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................308
Vehicle loading ..........................219
Ventilating your vehicle ...........194
319
320
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising